（全国通用）中考英语 第1-20周 阅读周周练（A、B卷）（打包20套）

阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Last
year
I
bought
some
flower
pots
(花盆).
I
didn’t
1
them
at
once.
One
day,
I
went
to
a
shop
2
some
flower
seeds
(种子).
Then
I
put
them
into
a
pot
with
soil
(土壤)
and
watered
them.
For
a
few
days,
3
happened.
I
went
on
watching.
On
the
4
day,
I
finally
saw
the
seeds
develop
and
felt
so
5
.
Our
life
is
sometimes
like
an
6
flower
pot
with
nothing
inside.
Our
days
are
filled
with
lots
of
different
things.
We
usually
don’t
do
them
7
we
think
they
are
not
very
important.
But
8
we
find
that
some
important
things
are
gone,
those
things
we
lost
in
life
are
seeds
of
hope,
love
and
dreams.
Planting
fun
in
hearts
is
just
like
9
flowers.
The
seeds
of
fun
in
hearts
will
develop
as
the
seeds
of
flowers.
So
if
I
plant
10
of
hope,
I
can
expect
something
wonderful.
(
)
1.
A.
make
B.
use
C.
buy
(
)
2.
A.
for
B.
by
C.
without
(
)
3.
A.
everything
B.
something
C.
nothing
(
)
4.
A.
tenth
B.
ten
C.
twelve
(
)
5.
A.
worried
B.
happy
C.
tired
(
)
6.
A.
big
B.
colorful
C.
empty
(
)
7.
A.
so
B.
that
C.
because
(
)
8.
A.
when
B.
after
C.
later
(
)
9.
A.
keeping
B.
growing
C.
watering
(
)
10.
A.
seeds
B.
soil
C.
pots
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Different
countries
have
different
customs
in
giving
presents.
In
China
you
must
never
give
a
clock
to
a
Chinese
person,
because
the
sound
of
the
word
for
“clock”
is
similar
to
the
sound
of
“death”.
Also,
don’t
wrap
(用……包裹)
a
present
in
white,
black,
or
blue
paper,
because
they
are
the
colours
for
funerals
(葬礼).
Don’t
give
a
knife,
because
something
sharp
can
cut
a
friendship.
In
Russia
if
you
give
flowers
as
presents,
you
have
to
give
an
odd
number
of
them
(one,
three,
five,
etc.)
because
even
numbers
of
flowers
are
for
funerals.
In
Germany
if
you
are
invited
to
dinner,
flowers
are
good
presents
to
take
to
your
dinner
hostess
(女主人)，but
don’t
take
her
red
roses
because
it
means
you
are
in
love
with
her.
Don’t
take
thirteen
of
anything
because
it’s
an
unlucky
number.
Don’t
take
an
even
number
of
anything,
either.
Don’t
wrap
your
presents
in
white,
brown,
or
black
paper.
(
)
1.
According
to
the
passage,
______
must
never
be
given
to
Chinese
people
as
presents.
A.
clocks
B.
clothes
C.
flowers
(
)
2.
People
don’t
wrap
presents
in
black
or
white
paper
in
______.
A.
Germany
B.
China
C.
both
China
and
Germany
(
)
3.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“even”
mean
in
Chinese
in
the
passage
A.
偶数的.
B.
奇数的.
C.
平坦的.
(
)
4.
What
presents
can
you
take
to
your
dinner
hostess
in
Germany
A.
Thirteen
of
something.
B.
Flowers
except
red
roses.
C.
An
even
number
of
something.
(
)
5.
Which
is
the
best
title
of
the
passage
A.
Foreigners’
presents
B.
Giving
flowers
as
presents
C.
Different
customs
in
giving
presents
B
Valentine’s
Day
February
14
is
a
day
for
people
who
have
fallen
in
love.
On
this
day,
these
men
and
women
give
gifts
and
cards
to
each
other
to
celebrate
Valentine’s
Day.
At
first,
February
14
was
the
old
Roman
festival,
Lupercalia.
Then,
on
February
14,
270
A.D.,
a
man
named
Valentine
was
killed
by
the
Romans
because
of
his
Christian
beliefs.
Before
Valentine
was
killed,
he
fell
in
love
with
the
daughter
of
his
jailer
(看守监狱的人)
and
would
pass
notes
to
her.
His
final
note
read,
“From
your
Valentine.”
Later,
February
14
became
known
as
Saint
(圣人)
Valentine’s
Day.
Since
then,
people
in
love
around
the
world
have
given
gifts
and
cards
to
each
other
on
Saint
Valentine’s
Day.
Gloves,
chocolates,
and
even
underwear
have
all
been
popular
as
gifts.
Valentine
cards
did
not
become
popular
until
the
1750s.
The
first
Valentine
cards
were
made
by
hand.
People
wrote
their
own
words
on
the
cards,
usually
a
kind
or
funny
message.
Cards
made
by
machines
became
more
popular
around
1850.
Now,
every
year
around
February
14,
cards
and
chocolates
fill
stores
around
the
world,
for
all
the
people
who
have
fallen
in
love.
(
)
6.
The
passage
mainly
tells
us
______.
A.
the
history
of
Valentine’s
Day
B.
why
people
fall
in
love
C.
the
most
romantic
Valentine’s
Day
ever
(
)
7.
Who
was
Saint
Valentine
A.
A
man
who
killed
someone.
B.
A
Roman
god.
C.
A
Christian.
(
)
8.
What
was
Lupercalia
A.
A
Christian
festival.
B.
A
Roman
festival.
C.
A
type
of
card.
(
)
9.
When
did
Valentine
cards
first
become
popular
A.
About
270.
B.
About
1750.
C.
About
1850.
(
)
10.
Why
is
Saint
Valentine
thought
to
be
romantic
(浪漫的)
A.
He
was
killed
by
the
Romans.
B.
He
fell
in
love
with
his
jailer.
C.
He
passed
love
notes
to
the
daughter
of
his
jailer.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
People
all
over
the
world
celebrate
the
New
Year.
However,
not
all
countries
celebrate
in
the
same
way,
and
in
some
countries,
the
New
Year
doesn’t
begin
on
the
1
date
very
year.
In
many
countries,
the
New
Year
begins
on
1st
January,
but
people
start
celebrating
on
31st
December,
New
Year’s
Eve.
In
New
York
many
people
go
to
celebrate
in
Times
Square.
2
they’re
waiting
for
the
New
Year,
they
listen
to
music,
sing
traditional
songs
and
have
fun.
Just
before
12
o’clock,
everyone
3
down
from
10:
10,
9,
8…
As
soon
as
it’s
12
o’clock,
everyone
shouts
very
4
,
“Happy
New
Year!”
New
Year’s
Day
is
often
a
family
day.
Some
families
get
together
for
a
special
meal.
When
the
weather
is
fine,
many
families
go
out
for
a
5
.
On
New
Year’s
Day,
many
people
make
resolutions
for
the
new
year.
They
6
a
list
of
things,
such
as
“I
will
help
out
more
with
housework.
I
will
work
7
at
school
than
others.”
or
“I
won’t
spend
so
much
time
playing
video
games.”
When
they
have
made
8
list,
they
read
it
to
their
family
or
friends
and
promise
to
9
their
resolutions.
So
it
doesn’t
matter
how
they
celebrate,
10
people
in
countries
all
over
the
world,
it’s
a
time
to
say
goodbye
to
the
old
year,
and
to
welcome
the
new.
(
)
1.
A.
familiar
B.
same
C.
important
(
)
2.
A.
If
B.
Even
though
C.
While
(
)
3.
A.
comes
B.
counts
C.
looks
(
)
4.
A.
loudly
B.
quietly
C.
sadly
(
)
5.
A.
walk
B.
secret
C.
job
(
)
6.
A.
put
on
B.
write
down
C.
take
away
(
)
7.
A.
quickly
B.
hard
C.
harder
(
)
8.
A.
its
B.
his
C.
their
(
)
9.
A.
follow
B.
make
C.
do
(
)
10.
A.
by
B.
for
C.
with
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Want
to
say
“hello”
from
Disneyland
Send
a
post
card!
Beautiful
scenes
of
paradise
(乐园),
wild
animals,
silly
pictures
—
you
can
find
them
all
in
one
place.
Where
On
a
post
card!
Have
people
always
sent
post
cards
No.
Before
post
cards,
people
liked
sealed
letters.
The
idea
for
the
first
decorated
(装饰)
post
card
came
to
John
P.
Charlton
in
1861.
He
thought
a
simple
card
with
decorations
would
be
a
great
way
to
send
a
note.
Then
in
the
late
1800s,
post
cards
with
pictures
appeared.
By
law,
people
had
to
write
their
note
on
the
front
—on
the
picture!
The
back
was
only
for
the
address.
Several
years
later,
England
allowed
a
divided-back
post
card.
Then
people
could
write
their
note
on
the
back
left
side
and
put
the
address
on
the
right.
During
the
early
1900s,
the
golden
age
of
post
cards,
picture
post
cards
became
a
craze
of
the
world.
In
1908,
Americans
alone
mailed
over
677
million
post
cards.
Today,
post
cards
are
the
third
most
popular
collection
in
the
world
after
stamps
and
coins.
(
)
1.
We
can
see
some
silly
pictures
on
the
post
cards.
(
)
2.
Post
cards
were
produced
before
sealed
letters.
(
)
3.
In
1861,
the
first
decorated
post
card
appeared.
(
)
4.
Post
cards
were
most
popular
during
the
early
1900s.
(
)
5.
Stamps,
coins
and
post
cards
are
the
most
popular
collections
in
the
world.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
A:
Mom,
my
American
friend,
Ann,
1
me
to
dinner
this
evening.
B:
Really
What
time
did
she
tell
you
to
2

A:
3
o’clock.
I’m
afraid
I
have
to
go
now.
B:
Don’t
4
in
such
a
hurry.
It’s
only
five
thirty.
You
still
have
one
and
a
half
hours
5
.
You
should
arrive
there
at
about
seven.
A:
Maybe
I
should
get
there
early,
6
she
will
be
worried.
B:
You
know,
in
the
USA,
people
go
to
dinner
7
too
late
nor
too
early.
8
,
her
home
isn’t
very
far
from
here.
A:
I
see.
What
do
you
think
I
should
9
with
me
B:
You
don’t
need
to
take
10
.
But
if
you
like,
you
can
take
some
flowers.
A:
Thank
you
very
much,
Mom.
B:
You’re
always
welcome.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
live
when
difference
impolite
make
other
country
important
decide
for
common
tell
When
you
go
to
restaurants
in
different
parts
of
the
world,
it’s
1
to
know
the
right
and
wrong
things
to
do.
For
example,
in
China
it’s
OK
to
2
a
lot
of
noise
in
a
restaurant.
In
fact,
if
a
restaurant
isn’t
noisy
and
3
,
you
may
think
there’s
something
wrong
with
it.
However,
in
many
western
4
,
restaurants
are
quiet
places.
If
a
table
is
too
loud,
5
who
are
eating
there
might
even
common
to
the
owner
of
the
restaurant.
Paying
the
bill
is
also
6
from
country
to
country.
In
China,
one
person
usually
pays
for
everybody,
but
they
don’t
in
western
countries.
7
friends
eat
together,
they
usually
share
the
cost.
This
is
called
“going
Dutch”.
Also,
when
westerners
pay
the
bill,
they
usually
leave
some
money
8
the
waiter.
This
is
called
“leaving
a
tip”.
Leaving
a
tip
is
thought
to
be
polite.
In
the
US,
it’s
9
to
leave
tips
of
10%,
15%
or
20%
of
the
bill,
which
10
how
good
the
service
is.
Good
waiters
can
make
a
lot
of
money!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Some
birthday
customs
are
quite
similar
in
many
parts
of
the
world—birthday
candles
(蜡烛),
birthday
games，and
birthday
cakes.
But
some
customs
are
more
specific
to
certain
countries.
Here
are
some
children
talking
about
their
customs.
Linda—I
am
fourteen.
I
come
from
Aruba.
In
our
country,
children
take
something
special
to
school
for
their
classmates
and
all
teachers.
Each
teacher
gives
the
birthday
child
a
small
gift
like
a
pencil,
an
eraser
or
a
postcard.
The
birthday
child
is
also
allowed
to
wear
special
clothes
instead
of
the
school
uniform.
Lucy—I
am
one
year
older
than
Linda.
Denmark
is
my
country.
A
flag
is
flown
outside
a
window
to
show
that
someone
who
lives
in
that
house
is
having
a
birthday.
Presents
are
placed
around
the
child’s
bed
while
they
are
sleeping
so
they
will
see
them
at
once
when
they
wake
up.
Tom—I
am
as
old
as
Linda.
I
am
from
Brazil.
The
birthday
child
receives
a
pull
on
the
earlobe
(耳垂)
for
each
year
in
my
country.
The
birthday
person
also
gives
the
first
slice
of
cake
to
his/her
most
special
friend
or
relative,
usually
Mom
or
Dad.
Names
Countries
Age
Special
customs
Linda
Aruba
Fourteen
Each
teacher
receives
something
special
from
1
and
gives
him
or
her
a
small
gift.
Lucy
Denmark
2
If
you
see
3
flying
outside
a
window,
you
may
know
someone
in
that
house
is
having
a
birthday.
Tom
4
Fourteen
5
of
the
birthday
cake
is
usually
given
to
Mom
or
Dad.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
The
world
is
an
interesting
place.
Different
people
like
different
things.
Some
people
like
loud
music.
Other
people
don’t.
1
Many
people
like
sports,
but
they
do
not
all
like
the
same
sports.
In
some
countries,
cricket
(板球运动)is
a
very
popular
sport.
In
others
it
is
not
popular
at
all.
No
one
plays
it
or
watches
it
on
TV.
However,
most
people
like
soccer.
The
World
Cup
is
very
popular.
2
Different
people
like
different
foods.
Some
people
do
not
like
meat.
3
Some
people
do
not
like
potatoes
or
bread.
They
prefer
rice.
4
Most
people
have
their
favorite
colors.
Some
people
like
bright
colors.
Others
prefer
pale
colors.
Many
people
like
traveling.
Different
people
like
different
places.
Some
people
like
to
go
to
the
country.
They
like
the
fresh
air.
Some
people
like
to
go
to
the
cities.
Because
they
like
shopping.
5
What
do
you
like
Have
you
got
an
idea
A.
They
like
soft
music.B.
Not
everyone
likes
the
same
color.C.
Millions
of
people
watch
the
games
on
TV.D.
Different
people
like
different
kinds
of
pets.E.
They
eat
fruit
and
vegetables
most
of
the
time.F.
Some
other
people
enjoy
beautiful
places
like
the
mountains
or
beaches.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
The
best
way
of
1
a
language
is
always
using
it.
The
best
way
of
learning
spoken
English
is
reading
in
English
as
2
as
possible.
Sometimes
you’ll
get
your
words
mixed
up
and
people
will
not
3
you.
Sometimes
people
will
4
things
too
quickly
and
you
can’t
understand
them.
But
5
you
keep
your
sense
of
humor,
you
can
always
have
a
good
laugh
at
the
mistake
you
6
.
Don’t
be
unhappy
if
people
seem
to
be
laughing
7
your
mistakes.
It’s
8
for
people
to
laugh
at
your
mistake
than
be
angry
with
you,
9
they
don’t
understand
what
you
are
saying.
The
most
important
thing
for
learning
English
is:
Don’t
be
10
of
making
mistakes
because
everyone
makes
mistakes.
(
)
1.
A.
learnt
B.
learn
C.
learning
(
)
2.
A.
much
B.
many
C.
a
lot
(
)
3.
A.
like
B.
know
C.
understand
(
)
4.
A.
say
B.
tell
C.
speak
(
)
5.
A.
if
B.
since
C.
although
(
)
6.
A.
have
B.
make
C.
produce
(
)
7.
A.
at
B.
on
C.
for
(
)
8.
A.
good
B.
better
C.
well
(
)
9.
A.
unless
B.
because
C.
as
long
as
(
)
10.
A.
worry
B.
unhappy
C.
afraid
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
If
English
is
not
your
first
language,
you
probably
would
like
to
learn
English
if
you
read
this
article.
English
just
like
any
other
languages,
the
earlier
or
the
younger
you
learn
the
language
the
better
is
your
ability
to
learn
it
and
to
pronounce
the
word
correctly.
Learn
English
from
books!
There
are
many
English
as
a
second
language
books,
you
can
read
and
learn
how
to
put
together
words
to
make
sentences.
If
you
just
start
to
learn
English,
you
also
need
English-your
native
language
dictionary
and
if
you
understand
most
English
words,
you
may
want
to
get
English-English
dictionary
instead.
You
can
learn
English
online
as
well.
There
are
many
sites
teach
English
as
a
second
language,
English
grammar
and
online
dictionary.
Some
English
books
also
come
with
audio,
so
you
can
hear
the
pronunciation
of
the
words
or
sentences.
Practice
make
perfect!
Talk
to
other
English
speaking
people
and
listen
carefully
when
someone
else
speak
in
English
(best
to
hear
it
from
native
English
speaker
to
get
the
right
pronunciation).
You
can
learn
English
from
TV
as
well.
If
you
just
learn
the
language,
try
to
watch
toddler
(初学步的孩子)
or
kid
channels
to
learn
the
language.
You
can
turn
on
the
subtitle
(副标题)
as
well
to
make
it
easier
to
learn.
(
)
1.
How
many
ways
to
learn
English
according
to
this
passage
A.
Two.
B.
Three.
C.
Four.
(
)
2.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“ability”
mean
in
Chinese
A.
能力.
B.
耐力.
C.
智慧.
(
)
3.
What
dictionary
should
Li
Ping
buy
if
she
is
an
English
beginner
A.
English-English
dictionary.
B.
English-Chinese
dictionary.
C.
English-Japanese
dictionary.
(
)
4.
Where
can
you
find
the
English
books
with
audio
A.
On
the
Internet.
B.
From
TV.
C.
From
native
English
speaker.
(
)
5.
What
does
the
passage
mainly
talk
about
A.
Learn
English
from
TV.
B.
Learn
English
online.
C.
How
to
learn
English.
B
Doing
homework
not
only
can
help
children
master
the
knowledge
they
have
learned,
but
also
can
train
their
abilities
of
finishing
the
work
alone,
planning
the
time
and
doing
the
duties.
But
some
children
don’t
like
to
complete
the
work.
Why
There
are
some
reasons.
Some
children
feel
it
is
very
difficult
to
do
their
homework,
because
they
can’t
understand
their
teacher
clearly,
and
can’t
follow
their
teacher’s
teaching
process
(过程).
Maybe
there
is
something
wrong
with
their
intelligence.
But
some
children’s
intelligence
is
normal.
They
are
even
cleverer,
but
they
don’t
listen
to
the
teacher
carefully.
It
is
hard
for
them
to
sit
well
and
pay
attention
to
anything.
It
needs
to
carry
on
the
attention
centralized
(集中注意力)
training
to
help
the
children.
Some
children
love
their
teacher
and
then
they
like
the
subject.
Their
interest
depends
on
(依靠)
the
teacher
who
teaches
them.
So
every
teacher
should
be
helpful
and
kind.
It
can
make
children
love
you
and
the
subject
you
teach.
So
they
can
do
their
homework
happily.
(
)
6.
Doing
homework
can
help
children
______.
A.
master
the
knowledge
B.
train
their
abilities
C.
both
A
and
B
(
)
7.
Some
children
find
the
homework
difficult.
Which
reason
is
NOT
right
A.
They
can’t
understand
their
teacher
clearly.
B.
They
cannot
follow
their
teachers
teaching
process.
C.
The
intelligence
of
all
the
students
isn’t
normal.
(
)
8.
What’s
the
Chinese
meaning
of
the
underlined
word
“intelligence”
A.
作业.
B.
智商.
C.
思想.
(
)
9.
According
to
the
last
paragraph,
the
writer
thinks
______
is
very
important.
A.
a
teacher
B.
a
subject
C.
homework
(
)
10.
What
is
the
best
title
of
the
passage
A.
Some
children
don’t
like
their
teacher.
B.
Children’s
homework
is
very
difficult.
C.
Why
don’t
some
children
like
to
do
homework
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
When
learning
new
vocabulary,
don’t
just
memorize
list
of
words.
1
,
try
to
make
five
sentences
using
each
new
word.
Then
use
the
new
word
as
you
can
the
first
day
you
learn
it.
This
way
you
will
remember
new
words
2
longer.
Practicing
sounds,
you
know,
is
difficult—the
“th”
sound
for
example,
choose
words
that
3
“th”
and
repeat
them
over
and
over
again
until
you
are
comfortable
with
them.
Let’s
try!
This,
that,
those,
them,
think,
thought,
through,
thin,
thick…
Read,
read,
read—in
English,
of
course!
Reading
is
one
of
4
ways
to
increase
your
vocabulary
and
5
your
grammar
in
a
natural
and
fun
way.
Be
sure
to
choose
topics
or
books
you
are
interested
in.
When
someone
6
in
English,
listen
for
the
main
point.
If
you
7
a
word
you
don’t
understand,
ignore
(忽略)
8
and
go
on
listening.
If
you
stop
and
think
about
the
word,
you
will
miss
9
the
person
is
saying.
Always
remember一Practice
10
perfect.
(
)
1.
A.
Instead
of
B.
Instead
C.
Rather
than
(
)
2.
A.
much
B.
many
C.
more
(
)
3.
A.
end
up
with
B.
begin
C.
begin
with
(
)
4.
A.
best
B.
the
best
C.
better
(
)
5.
A.
encourage
B.
change
C.
improve
(
)
6.
A.
is
talking
B.
talk
C.
are
talking
(
)
7.
A.
listen
B.
hear
C.
listen
to
(
)
8.
A.
one
B.
them
C.
it
(
)
9.
A.
nothing
else
B.
everything
else
C.
everything
other
(
)
10.
A.
makes
B.
making
C.
make
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Besides
studying
and
tests,
teens
need
to
learn
some
life
skills
for
the
future.
These
skills
can
help
them
live
by
themselves.
The
following
are
some
necessary
skills.
◆Managing
money
You
often
get
a
little
money
from
your
parents,
and
you
may
spend
it
as
you
like.
You
can
make
a
list
of
the
things
that
you
want
to
buy,
and
plan
how
to
spend
the
money.
Don’t
waste.
◆Washing
and
cleaning
Doing
laundry
correctly
is
important.
You
should
first
read
the
instructions
on
clothing,
and
then
check
the
pockets
of
the
clothes.
Pay
more
attention
to
different
colors
of
them.
As
for
cleaning,
you
should
learn
how
to
use
brooms,
mops
(抹布)
and
so
on.
If
you
often
do
more
cleaning,
the
people
who
live
with
you
will
thank
you
for
the
efforts
you
make.
◆Cooking
your
favorite
meals
You
should
learn
how
to
cook
a
few
of
your
favorite
meals.
First
ask
your
parents
for
help
to
decide
on
the
menu
and
ingredients,
and
then
you
can
go
shopping,
cook
the
meals
and
clean
up
the
kitchen
together.
(
)
1.
This
passage
is
mainly
about
some
life
skills
for
teens
for
the
future.
(
)
2.
Teens
should
manage
money
by
saving
money
as
much
as
they
can.
(
)
3.
Before
they
wash
clothes,
teens
should
first
check
the
pockets
of
the
clothes.
(
)
4.
The
people
around
will
feel
uncomfortable
if
teens
do
more
cleaning.
(
)
5.
Parents
can
help
teens
decide
on
the
menu
and
ingredients
to
cook
meals.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
A:
I’m
going
to
1
my
English
this
term.
B:
Really
2
are
you
going
to
do
then
A:
I
want
to
get
up
early
and
to
3
English
for
half
an
hour
in
the
morning.
B:
Oh,
that’s
a
good
idea.
A:
And
I
want
to
listen
to
the
English
programs
4
radio
while
I
am
having
breakfast.
B:
Anything
5

A:
I
want
to
read
English
for
two
hours
6
I
go
to
bed
in
the
evening
and
I
want
to
7
a
diary
in
English
every
day.
B:
Is
that
all
A:
Yes.
What
do
you
think
of
my
8

B:
Great!
But
you
see,
you
9
so
much
time
studying
English.
What
about
the
other
10

A:
I
don’t
know!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
understand
China
difficult
instead
a
important
end
up
lose
you
give
up
enough
something
How
can
we
practice
our
spoken
English
The
first
and
the
most
1
thing
is
to
believe
yourself.
You
should
always
be
full
of
confidence,
or
you
will
never
be
able
to
improve
your
English.
You
should
often
encourage
2
“Come
on,
don’t
be
afraid.”
You
should
never
lose
heart
and
never
3
.
Maybe
you
are
afraid
of
4
face,
but
you
should
think
since
we
are
students
and
we
are
learning,
there
is
no
need
to
worry
about
5
.
You
must
always
be
active
in
practice.
There
is
no
problem
that
your
pronunciation
and
intonation
(语调)
can’t
be
as
good
as
the
native
people
because
we
are
6
,
and
we
don’t
have
chances
to
live
in
foreign
countries
and
talk
with
the
people
there.
But
you
must
know
that
the
main
way
to
study
English
is
to
make
ourselves
7
other
people.
You
should
believe
that
native
speakers
will
not
laugh
at
you,
8
they
will
encourage
you.
So
if
you
are
brave
9
,
you
will
certainly
make
rapid
progress
in
your
spoken
English.
Don’t
be
shy
or
afraid!
Just
have
10
try.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
A
different
way
of
teaching
is
widely
used
in
our
English
study.
Before
class,
we
make
study
plans
first.
Then
we
look
up
the
new
words,
listen
to
the
recording
and
read
the
text.
When
we
meet
problems,
we
can’t
solve
by
ourselves.
We
always
write
them
down
in
our
notebooks.
In
class,
we
sit
in
groups
to
discuss
the
problems
freely.
The
teacher
always
offers
help
when
we
need.
After
discussion,
it’s
time
for
us
to
give
a
report
to
the
class.
We
also
make
conversations
in
pairs
and
practice
a
lot.
It’s
really
good
for
our
listening
and
speaking.
After
class,
we
have
less
homework
now
so
we
can
go
to
the
library
to
read
English
books,
magazines
and
newspapers.
We
can
also
surf
the
internet
for
useful
information.
In
a
word,
we
enjoy
the
new
way
of
studying.
We
can
make
more
progress
in
our
study.
Information
Card
Main
idea
A
different
way
of
learning
is
1
used
in
our
English.
study.
Changes
Before
class
We
make
study
2
first.
3
class
We
sit
in
groups
to
4
the
problem
freely.
After
class
We
have
5
homework
so
we
can
go
to
the
library.
Conclusion
(结论）
In
a
word,
we
can
make
more
progress
in
the
new
way.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
A.
So
how
long
have
you
been
studying
English
B.
Hey,
Mario.
You
get
an
A
in
the
English
test
again.
You
are
so
talented.
C.
I
agree
with
you.
D.
You’re
welcome.
E.
For
more
than
ten
years.
F.
Thank
you.
But
in
fact
my
spoken
English
is
very
good,
I
am
not
good
at
writing.
G.
Thank
you
very
much.
H.
Well,
if
you
can
speak
very
well,
I’m
sure
you
can
also
make
progress
in
writing
skills.
I.
That’s
a
little
long
time.
I
think
maybe
you
have
many
experiences
of
learning
English.
Would
you
mind
giving
me
some
suggestions
I
often
have
a
difficult
time
memorizing
new
words.
And
I
find
it
very
frustrating
all
the
time.
J.
Oh,
I
used
to
be
afraid
of
that
too.
But
after
I
joined
the
English
club,
I
have
been
doing
quite
well
about
new
words.
We
always
make
some
flashcard
and
make
vocabulary
lists.
It
helps
a
lot.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
There
are
two
kinds
of
music
in
the
world－one
is
written
down
and
the
other
is
not.
Many
people
earn
their
living
1
music.
They
write
songs
for
pop
stars
and
music
for
films
and
TV
plays.
They
usually
write
exact
institutions
on
2
the
music
is
played.
Folk
music
has
been
passed
down
from
one
generation
to
another.
At
first
it
was
never
written
down.
People
3
the
songs
from
their
families,
relatives,
neighbors
and
friends
in
the
same
village.
These
songs
were
4
country
life,
the
seasons,
animals
and
plants,
and
about
love
and
5
in
people’s
lives.
Early
performers
of
music
were
popular
and
respected.
They
6
learn
hundreds
of
songs
7
.
On
festivals
they
used
to
act
and
sing
in
praise
of
heroes
8
lived
long
ago.
This
was
at
a
time
9
there
was
no
radio,
TV
of
cinema.
Many
of
the
country
people
10
read
nor
write.
In
this
way
stories
were
passed
on
from
one
person
to
another.
This
continues
even
today.
(
)
1.
A.
from
writing
B.
with
writing
C.
to
write
(
)
2.
A.
why
B.
when
C.
what
(
)
3.
A.
learn
B.
learnt
C.
are
learning
(
)
4.
A.
about
B.
to
C.
for
(
)
5.
A.
sad
B.
happy
C.
sadness
(
)
6.
A.
were
used
to
B.
are
using
C.
used
to
(
)
7.
A.
with
heart
B.
by
heart
C.
to
heart
(
)
8.
A.
who
B.
whom
C.
when
(
)
9.
A.
where
B.
when
C.
that
(
)
10.
A.
can
neither
B.
can
either
C.
could
neither
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
I
can’t
remember
when
I
fell
in
love
with
music.
Maybe
it
happened
when
I
was
feeling
blue
sometime
long
ago.
I
can’t
tell
you
exactly
how
music
makes
me
feel
better.
But
when
listening
to
music,
especially
light
music,
it
makes
me
feel
calm
and
peaceful.
Now
I
am
listening
to
a
song
named
Moon
River.
It
is
really
a
fantastic
song.
It
inspired
(激发)
me
to
write
this
article.
I
didn’t
like
this
song
at
the
beginning,
but
later
found
its
slow
melody
and
beautiful
lyrics
deeply
touching.
“Oh,
dream
maker,
your
heart
breaker.
Wherever
you’re
going
I’m
going
your
way.
Two
drifters
off
to
see
the
world.
There’s
such
a
lot
of
world
to
see.”
Yes.
Although
there
is
a
long
way
to
go
for
the
drifter
and
maybe
there
are
many
troubles
ahead,
he
seems
afraid
of
nothing.
I
like
music.
Music
reminds
me
that
human
beings
have
a
lot
in
common
even
if
they
come
from
different
countries
or
background,
because
we
all
have
the
same
feelings
or
understanding
of
melodies
and
words.
(
)
1.
The
writer
likes
______
music.
A.
popular
B.
light
C.
classical
(
)
2.
The
writer
didn’t
like
the
song
called
Moon
River
______.
A.
now
B.
at
all
C.
at
the
beginning
(
)
3.
From
the
song,
we
know
that
the
drifter
seems
afraid
of
______.
A.
everything
B.
nothing
C.
dogs
(
)
4.
The
writer
thinks
people
who
come
from
different
countries
have
______.
A.
the
same
feelings
of
melodies
and
words
B.
different
understanding
of
melodies
and
words
C.
different
feelings
of
melodies
and
words
(
)
5.
The
writer
began
to
love
music
when
he/she
was
______
sometime
long
ago.
A.
happy
B.
excited
C.
blue
B
Popular
music
in
America
is
what
every
student
likes.
Students
carry
small
radios
with
earphones
and
listen
to
music
before
class,
after
class,
and
at
lunch.
Students
with
cars
buy
large
speakers
and
play
the
music
loudly
as
they
drive
on
the
street.
Adult
drivers
listen
to
music
on
the
car
radio
as
they
drive
to
work.
They
also
listen
to
the
news
about
sports,
the
weather,
and
the
life
of
American
people.
Most
of
the
radio
programmes
are
music.
Pop
or
popular
music
singers
make
much
money.
They
make
a
CD
or
tape
which
radio
stations
use
in
many
places.
Once
the
popular
singer
is
heard
all
over
the
country,
young
people
buy
his
or
her
tape.
Some
of
the
money
from
these
tapes
goes
to
the
singer.
Wherever
the
singer
goes,
all
the
young
people
want
to
meet
him
or
her.
Now
the
singer
has
become
a
national
star.
There
are
other
kinds
of
music
that
are
important
to
Americans.
One
is
called
folk
(民间的)
music.
It
tells
stories
about
the
common
life
of
Americans.
Another
is
called
western
or
country
music.
This
was
started
by
cowboys
who
would
sing
at
night
to
the
cows
they
were
watching.
Today,
any
music
about
country
life
and
the
love
between
a
country
boy
and
his
girl
is
called
western
or
country
music.
(
)
6.
Which
of
the
following
is
talked
in
the
passage
A.
Pop
music,
folk
music.
B.
Popular,
folk
and
country
music.
C.
Pop
music
and
western
music.
(
)
7.
When
will
pop
singers
become
national
stars
A.
When
they
make
much
money.
B.
When
they
make
a
CD
or
tape.
C.
When
they
are
loved
by
all
the
young
people.
(
)
8.
What’s
country
music
about
A.
It’s
about
the
common
life
of
Americans.
B.
It’s
about
the
country
life
and
love
stories.
C.
It’s
about
the
life
of
cowboys.
(
)
9.Which
of
the
following
is
true
according
to
the
passage
A.
Most
students
in
America
like
popular
music.
B.
Students
with
cars
in
America
like
to
listen
to
music
while
driving.
C.
Adult
drivers
in
America
listen
to
music
all
the
time
while
driving.
(
)
10.
What’s
the
best
title
for
the
passage
A.
American
Music　
B.
Popular
Music
C.
History
of
Music
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
A
few
years
ago,
I
came
to
a
lady’s
house
to
1
some
vitamins.
Upon
entering
the
house,
I
noticed
that
there
was
an
electronic
keyboard
against
the
wall.
Being
a
2
music
lover
and
player,
I
asked
if
the
woman
played.
She
said
“Yes”
and
added
that
she
had
been
taking
lessons—at
age
54!
I
told
her
that
was
very
impressive
for
3
to
pursue
her
passion
to
play
the
piano.
“I
have
been
playing
for
8
years
now.”
I
said.
“Could
you
play
a
song
for
me
4
you
leave ”
she
asked.
I
thought
she
was
joking
and
I
only
smiled.
By
the
end
of
buying,
she
5
me
of
our
musical
“deal”.
She
then
showed
me
to
an
old
upright
piano
in
the
living
room
and
asked
me
to
play
a
song
for
her.
I
thought
for
a
6
and
decided
to
play
David
Lanz’s
“Return
to
the
Heart”.
I
tried
my
best
to
play
the
song,
with
much
emotions
pouring
into
it
as
I
7
.
She
loved
it.
As
I
was
about
to
step
out
of
the
door,
I
heard
a
weak
voice
calling
out
“Young
man!”
I
turned
around.
And
there
was
an
old
lady
taking
one
little
step
at
a
time
8
the
help
of
another
woman.
“I
wanted
to
come
out
to
thank
you
for
the
beautiful
song
that
you
played.
I
have
been
very
9
,
and
it’s
very
hard
for
me
to
get
off
my
bed,
but
I
really
wanted
to
thank
you
for
the
song.
It
made
me
feel
good...”
she
said.
I
was
deeply
touched
and
felt
a
deeper
understanding
10
the
song.
It
served
its
purpose
beautifully,
returning
to
one’s
heart
for
peace
and
joy.
(
)
1.
A.
send
B.
sell
C.
buy
(
)
2.
A.
piano
B.
violin
C.
guitar
(
)
3.
A.
me
B.
us
C.
her
(
)
4.
A.
after
B.
before
C.
since
(
)
5.
A.
made
B.
gave
C.
reminded
(
)
6.
A.
rest
B.
break
C.
moment
(
)
7.
A.
did
B.
could
C.
might
(
)
8.
A.
from
B.
with
C.
without
(
)
9.
A.
nice
B.
well
C.
sick
(
)
10.
A.
for
B.
to
C.
with
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
One
day,
two
young
men
went
to
a
small
city.
They
stayed
outside
a
shop
for
a
long
time,
and
they
seemed
to
have
nothing
to
do.
The
owner
of
the
shop
felt
they
were
unusual.
So
he
used
his
new
mobile
phone
to
take
a
picture
of
them.
After
that
he
sent
a
message
with
the
picture
to
the
police.
The
picture
surprised
the
police
because
the
persons
in
the
picture
had
done
something
wrong
before.
And
the
police
were
trying
to
catch
them!
A
police
car
was
immediately
sent
to
the
shop.
The
two
young
men
were
caught
there.
Later
a
policeman
told
the
reporter,
“We
think
this
is
the
first
time
in
the
world
that
a
picture
message
has
been
used
to
help
catch
criminals
(罪犯).”
(
)
1.
The
owner
of
the
shop
sent
the
picture
message
to
the
police.
(
)
2.
The
two
young
men
went
to
the
shop
to
buy
a
new
mobile
phone.
(
)
3.
The
shop
owner
thought
the
two
young
men
were
kind.
(
)
4.
The
two
young
men
were
caught
by
the
police.
(
)
5.
The
police
thought
a
picture
message
was
often
used
to
help
catch
criminals.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
Larry:
What
beautiful
1
!
Tom:
No,
they’re
not
pictures.
They’re
2
.
Larry:
Stamps
What
are
they
used
for
Tom:
They
are
used
for
3
letters.
Larry:
How
many
stamps
have
you
got
Tom:
I’ve
got
4
than
700
of
them.
Larry:
How
long
have
you
been
5
them
Tom:
I’ve
been
collecting
them
6
I
was
five
years
old.
Larry:
7
are
you
going
to
be
when
you
grow
up’
Tom:
I’m
going
to
be
a
stamp
designer
(设计师)
.
Larry:
What
are
you
going
to
8
to
be
a
stamp
designer
Tom:
I’m
going
to
study
9
really
hard
and
go
to
an
art
college.
Larry:
I
hope
your
10
can
come
true.
Tom:
Thank
you.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
tour
band
sing
have
hope
home
concert
appear
if
real
Don’t
miss
the
New
Ocean
Waves!
Do
you
like
pop
music？Most
people
do.
One
of
the
best
1
on
the
music
scene
is
the
New
Ocean
Waves.
In
the
last
twelve
months,
they’ve
had
three
major
2
and
made
a
hit
CD.
They’re
going
to
3
on
CCTV
next
month.
And
then
they’re
going
to
go
on
a
world
4
in
which
they
will
perform
in
ten
different
cities.
Be
sure
not
to
miss
them
5
they
come
to
a
city
near
you—if
you
can
get
tickets,
that
is.
“For
years,
we
played
other
people’s
songs,”
says
lead
6
Zhu
Wen.
“But
now
we
play
mostly
our
own
songs.
We’ve
7
a
few
songs
in
the
top
ten,
but
we
really
8
to
have
a
number
one
hit
some
day.”
Good
luck
to
the
New
Ocean
Waves!
They’re
off
to
a
great
start.
And
they’re
9
nice
people.
Did
you
know
that
they
gave
half
of
the
money
they
made
to
a
charity
for
10
children
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Living
With
a
Single
Parent
If
you
live
with
one
parent,
you
know
that
a
lot
of
other
kids
do,
too.
More
than
20
million
kids
in
the
United
States
live
with
one
parent.
Separation
(分离)
and
divorce
(离婚)
are
the
most
common
reasons
for
this.
In
other
cases,
the
mom
and
dad
may
never
have
lived
together,
or
one
of
them
may
have
died.
Living
with
one
parent
instead
of
two
can
bring
out
a
lot
of
emotions
(情绪).
These
feelings
can
be
pretty
strong,
and
they
can
be
confusing,
too.
You
might
feel
terribly
sad
and
angry
because
your
parents
divorced.
You
also
might
feel
happy
that
your
parents
split
up
and
aren’t
fighting
any
more,
but
you
may
also
feel
upset
when
your
mom
introduces
you
to
a
man
that
she
is
dating.
You
might
love
the
uncle
or
grandma
who
takes
care
of
you,
but
sometimes
you
might
wish
you
could
have
one
family
with
both
a
mom
and
a
dad.
Emotions
all
by
themselves
aren’t
either
good
or
bad.
They’re
just
feelings.
Because
living
with
one
parent
can
sometimes
be
stressful,
it
can
help
to
talk
about
it.
You
can
talk
with
your
parent,
a
relative,
school
teacher,
or
another
trusted
adult.
Talking
with
other
kids
who
live
with
single
parents
can
be
a
great
idea,
too.
Living
With
a
Single
Parent
Emotions
●Don’t
feel
1
or
bad.
Causes
●Separation
and
divorce
are
the
most
common
reasons.●Dad
never
has
lived
with
Mom
together.●One
of
them
may
have
2
.
Effects
3
●To
feel
terribly
sad
and
angry.●To
feel
upset
when
Mom
is
dating.●To
4
.
Good
effects
●To
feel
happy
that
your
parents
5
and
aren’t
fighting
any
more.
Wish
●To
have
one
family
with
both
a
mom
and
a
dad.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
There
is
an
old
English
saying.
It
tells
us
that
we
must
go
to
bed
early
in
the
evening
and
get
up
early
in
the
morning.
A.
The
body
also
needs
exercise.
B.
Children
of
young
age
should
have
ten
hours’
sleep
every
night.
C.
The
head
also
needs
blood.
Exercise
helps
us
to
think
better.
D.
This
is
true.
The
body
must
have
enough
sleep
to
be
healthy.
E.
Exercise
also
helps
the
blood
to
move
around
inside
the
body.
F.
Then
we
will
be
healthy.
We
will
be
rich
and
clever,
too.
G.
It
is
very
important.
Our
blood
moves
to
all
parts
of
our
body.
H.
Walking,
jumping,
swimming,
running
and
playing
games
are
all
exercise.
I.
Exercise
keeps
the
body
strong.
J.
Children
who
don’t
have
enough
sleep
can
not
do
their
work
well
and
they
may
not
be
healthy.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
TV
has
a
huge
influence
on
our
lives.
Many
people
like
to
watch
TV.
Watching
TV
is
one
of
the
most
important
1
of
the
day.
TV
brings
the
outside
2
closer
to
people’s
homes.
Some
people
say
the
world
is
3
than
before
because
of
TV.
Do
you
think
so
What’s
4
in
other
countries
How
do
people
live
in
far
away
places
Is
5
a
good
sports
game
somewhere
What
lives
in
the
deepest
sea
If
you
want
to
6
these
and
other
kinds
of
questions,
just
7
the
TV
and
watch.
You
can
see
a
lot
and
learn
a
lot.
Of
course,
people
can
also
learn
8
reading
or
listening
to
the
radio.
9
with
TV
they
can
learn
better
and
more
easily.
Why
Because
they
can
both
hear
and
see.
TV
helps
to
open
our
eyes.
TV
also
helps
to
open
our
10
.
TV
often
gives
us
new
ideas.
We
learn
newer
and
better
ways
of
doing
things.
(
)
1.
A.
sports
B.
jobs
C.
activities
(
)
2.
A.
world
B.
space
C.
environment
(
)
3.
A.
richer
B.
smaller
C.
bigger
(
)
4.
A.
shining
B.
happening
C.
changing
(
)
5.
A.
there
B.
that
C.
it
(
)
6.
A.
ask
B.
discuss
C.
answer
(
)
7.
A.
turn
off
B.
turn
up
C.
turn
on
(
)
8.
A.
through
B.
about
C.
for
(
)
9.
A.
So
B.
But
C.
Or
(
)
10.
A.
arms
B.
mouths
C.
minds
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
The
designer
of
the
Apple
Computer,
Steve
Jobs,
was
not
quite
successful
in
his
early
years.
He
was
not
among
the
best
students
at
school,
and
from
time
to
time
he
got
into
trouble
with
either
his
schoolmates
or
his
teachers.
But
he
was
full
of
new
ideas,
which
few
people
saw
the
value
of.
Things
remained
the
same
when
he
went
up
to
college
and
he
dropped
out
halfway.
Steve
Jobs
worked
first
as
a
video
game
designer
at
Atari.
He
worked
there
for
only
a
few
months
and
then
he
set
out
to
tour
India.
He
hoped
that
the
trip
would
give
him
more
ideas
and
give
him
a
change
in
life
for
the
better.
After
he
returned
from
India,
he
began
to
live
on
a
farm
in
California.
And
then,
in
1975,
Steve
Jobs
set
about
making
a
new
type
of
computer.
Along
with
his
friend
Stephen
Wozniak,
he
designed
the
Apple
Computer
in
his
bedroom
and
built
it
in
his
garage
(车库).
He
gave
the
name
“Apple”
because
it
reminded
him
of
a
happy
summer
he
once
on
an
orchard
(果园)
in
Oregon.
His
Apple
Computer
was
so
successful
that
Steve
Jobs
soon
became
worldwide
famous.
But
unluckily,
he
died
of
illness
in
2012.
(
)
1.
Steve
Jobs
______
when
he
was
in
school.
A.
was
an
outstanding
student
B.
didn’t
do
very
well
C.
was
always
praised
by
others
(
)
2.
The
underlined
word
“value”
means
______.
A.
beauty
B.
chance
C.
importance
(
)
3.
Steve
Jobs
______.
A.
didn’t
finish
his
college
education
B.
didn’t
go
to
college
at
all
C.
studied
in
college
for
4
years
(
)
4.
Steve
Jobs
named
his
computer
company
“Apple”
because
______.
A.
apple
was
his
favorite
fruit
B.
he
designed
the
computer
under
an
apple
tree
C.
he
wanted
to
remember
the
happy
time
on
the
orchard
(
)
5.
Steve
Job’s
______
would
be
the
most
important
thing
for
his
lifetime
success.
A.
“failure”
in
school
B.
new
ideas
C.
travel
on
India
B
The
Internet,
mobile
phones
and
iPads
are
part
of
our
lives
now.
Technology
is
greatly
affecting
all
ways
of
our
lives,
from
the
ways
we
work
to
the
ways
we
play.
And
it
even
causes
a
number
of
social
problems
such
as
cloning
humans.
We
have
had
lots
of
technology
and
it
has
changed
our
lives
a
lot.
There
is
no
doubt
that
humans
will
continue
to
use
more
and
more
technology.
Here
are
some
examples
of
modern
technology
that
will
change
our
ideas
and
will
affect
our
lives
greatly.
Global
Positioning
System
(GPS)
(全球定位系统)
It’s
a
system
that
uses
radio
signals
from
satellites
to
show
exact
(精确的)
information.
It
tells
you
where
the
user
is
on
the
earth
in
all
weather
conditions.
It’s
made
up
of
three
parts:
satellites,
control
equipments
(设备)
on
land
and
receivers.
Space
Technology
Russian
and
American
scientists
have
worked
together
for
the
international
Space
Station
(ISS)
for
a
long
time.
They
hope
the
ISS
will
provide
a
long-lasting
lab.
Such
a
lab
will
bring
humans
limitless
(无限的)
advantages.
It’s
even
hoped
that
one
day
spare
technology
will
take
humans
to
their
new
houses
in
space.
Underwater
Robot
Hercules
is
a
kind
of
underwater
robot
with
some
high
technology
equipments.
It
will
be
used
to
search
for
ancient
ships
which
were
destroyed
into
the
deep
sea
during
their
journey
long
ago.
The
world
is
changing
so
quickly
that
it’s
hard
for
us
to
catch
up
with
all
the
new
inventions
because
they
seem
to
come
out
every
month.
It’s
important
for
us
to
learn
about
new
technology
and
the
role
that
it
plays
in
our
lives.
So
we
should
be
willing
to
accept
modern
technology,
or
we
will
fall
behind
the
times.
(
)
6.
______
can
tell
you
where
the
user
is
on
the
earth
exactly.
A.
Satellites
B.
Receivers
C.
Global
Positioning
System
(
)
7.
According
to
the
passage,
which
is
NOT
true
about
the
ISS
A.
It
has
carried
people
to
other
planets.
B.
It
will
provide
a
long-lasting
lab
for
us.
C.
Russian
and
American
scientists
are
working
for
it.
(
)
8.
Hercules
is
used
to
______.
A.
save
lives
in
the
sea
B.
take
pictures
in
the
sea
C.
look
for
the
ancient
ships
in
the
sea
(
)
9.
From
the
passage,
we
know
that
______.
A.
the
use
of
GPS
is
affected
by
the
weather
conditions
B.
it’s
very
important
for
us
to
learn
about
new
technology
C.
it’s
easy
for
us
to
catch
up
with
all
the
new
inventions
(
)
10.
What
is
the
purpose
of
the
passage
A.
To
help
us
study
some
new
technology.
B.
To
tell
us
technology
is
changing
the
world.
C.
To
help
solve
the
problems
that
technology
causes.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
The
term
“Web
log”
was
invented
by
Jorn
Barger
in
December
of
1997.
The
1
form
“blog”
was
used
for
the
first
time
by
Peter
Merholz
in
1999.
According
to
Webster’s
Dictionary
of
English,
a
blog
is
an
online
2,
a
personal
record
of
thoughts
published
on
a
Web
page.
Some
people
blog
to
relax
themselves,
others
to
find
3
.
There
are
political
blogs,
law
blogs,
and
travel
blogs.
On
personal
blogs,
people
type
whatever
they
want,
hit
a
“publish”
button,
and
then,
their
article
is
on
the
Internet
for
4
to
see.
New
tools
allow
bloggers
to
add
photos,
music
or
videos,
and
link
to
other
blogs.
Teens
are
big
bloggers.
According
to
the
Nov.
2
report
from
the
Pew
Internet
&
American
Life
Project
19%
of
online
teens,
or
about
four
million
people,
have
their
own
on-line
blogs,
and
38%
of
all
online
teens－about
8
million－
5
them.
According
to
6
study,
only
7%
of
adult
Internet
users
have
set
up
blogs,
and
27%
read
them.
“I
blog
because
I
love
to
write
(although
sometimes
I
do
very
7
of
it),”
wrote
a
young
girl
Jamie
from
Texas
on
her
own
blog.
“Because
I
like
to
read
other
people’s
thoughts,
8
with
them,
and
be
their
friend.
Because
it
is
a
wonderful
9
of
relaxation
from
the
studying,
going-to-class,
and
being-lonely
that
I
experience
in
10
life.”
(
)
1.
A.
long
B.
short
C.
correct
(
)
2.
A.
letter
B.
book
C.
diary
(
)
3.
A.
support
B.
things
C.
success
(
)
4.
A.
someone
B.
everyone
C.
anyone
(
)
5.
A.
see
B.
read
C.
buy
(
)
6.
A.
another
B.
other
C.
the
other
(
)
7.
A.
few
B.
a
few
C.
little
(
)
8.
A.
fight
B.
make
friends
C.
quarrel
(
)
9.
A.
way
B.
road
C.
idea
(
)
10.
A.
people’s
B.
other’s
C.
my
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
You
can
see
a
kind
of
little
cars
in
the
streets
in
the
future.
People
will
like
this
kind
of
small
cars
better
than
the
big
ones.
The
car
is
as
small
as
a
bike
but
it
can
carry
two
people
in
it.
Everybody
can
drive
it
easily,
just
like
riding
a
bike.
Even
children
and
old
people
can
drive
them
to
schools
or
parks.
If
everyone
drives
such
cars
in
the
future,
there
will
be
less
pollution
in
the
air.
There
will
be
more
space
for
all
the
cars
in
cities,
and
there
will
also
be
more
space
for
people
to
walk
in
the
streets.
The
little
cars
of
the
future
will
cost
less
money
to
buy
and
to
drive.
These
little
cars
can
go
only
65
kilometers
an
hour,
so
driving
will
be
safer.
The
cars
of
the
future
will
be
fine
for
going
around
the
city,
but
they
will
not
be
useful
for
a
long
trip.
This
kind
of
cars
can
save
a
lot
of
gas
(汽油).
They
will
go
450
kilometers,
then
they
have
to
stop
for
more
gas.
They
are
nice
cars,
aren’t
they
(
)
1.
Driving
big
cars
can
make
the
air
dirtier.
(
)
2.
The
little
cars
can
make
more
space
for
other
cars
and
people.
(
)
3.
These
little
cars
will
be
useful
for
a
long
trip.
(
)
4.
This
kind
of
cars
can
save
much
gas.
(
)
5.
Only
children
and
old
people
can
drive
the
little
cars.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
A:
Good
morning.
Can
I
help
you
B:
Yes.
I’d
like
to
1
a
duster.
A:
What
about
this
2

It’s
the
newest.
B:
Oh,
it
looks
nice
and
it’s
so
light.
The
feathers
3
soft,
too.
What
are
they
made
of
A:
The
feathers
are
made
of
space-age
fibers.
B:
Space-age
fibers
Then
what’s
the
difference
4
this
duster
and
the
traditional
ones
A:
The
traditional
ones
just
move
dirty
particles
around
5
this
duster
attracts
dirty
particles
and
securely
holds
on
to
them.
B:
Really
What
can
I
clean
6
such
a
duster
A:
You
can
safely
clean
furniture,
TVs,
chandeliers,
etc.
B:
7
do
I
remove
dirty
panicles
from
it
A:
Put
it
into
water
each
time
8
you
have
finished
cleaning
and
it
will
become
9
.
B:
They
are
really
magic.
I’ll
take
one.
What’s
the
10
of
it
A:
It’s
ten
yuan.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
get
nobody
it
shout
how
be
ring
else
other
again
arrive
little
The
mobile
phone
is
a
useful
thing,
but
maybe
I
don’t
know
1
to
use
it.
Sometimes
it
makes
things
difficult
for
me.
One
day
I
wanted
to
see
my
friend
nearby.
I
could
2
at
his
house
in
five
minutes,
but
I
looked
at
my
mobile
phone
and
thought
3
would
be
better
to
ring
him
up.
I
4
him
for
the
first
time,
but
the
line
was
busy.
Five
minutes
later,
there
was
an
answer,
but
it
was
the
wrong
number.
Then
I
tried
5
and
this
time
I
got
an
answer
from
him.
I
asked
him
if
he
was
at
home
in
the
afternoon.
And
he
said－at
6
I
thought
he
said—he
would
be
at
home
all
afternoon.
So
I
went
to
his
house,
but
then
I
found
7
in.
I
called
him
for
the
fourth
time.
This
time
I
got
so
angry
that
I
8
,
“You
are
not
at
home
But
you
just
told
me
over
the
telephone
that
you
would
be
at
home
all
afternoon!”
Here
9
his
answer,
“No,
I
said:
‘I
will
NOT
be
at
home
all
afternoon.’”
I
went
back
to
my
room,
sat
down
in
front
of
the
mobile
phone
and
looked
at
it.
What
10
could
I
do
Nothing!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
The
world’s
first
“flying
car”
will
soon
appear
in
the
market－It
will
be
yours
for
just
￡127,000.
The
Terrafugia
Transition
is
a
light
sport
plane
with
four
wheels
and
foldable
(可折叠的)
wings.
It
can
fly
up
through
the
sides
just
like
a
regular
plane,
then
land
on
the
ground,
fold
up
its
two
wings
and
drive
down
the
road
at
highway
speeds.
It
is
19
feet
long
and
can
fly
a
distance
of
460
miles,
with
a
top
speed
of
115
mph
in
the
air
and
60
mph
on
the
highway.
According
to
early
reports,
the
plane
uses
common
gas－no
rocket
fuels
(燃料)
are
necessary.
It
gets
its
power
through
the
100
horsepower
four-stroke
Rotax
912S
engine.
It
is
about
as
wide
as
most
normal
cars
except
the
folded
gliders
(折叠的助滑装置).
The
Terrafugia
Transition
can
be
put
into
most
garages
(车库)
and
drive
normally
on
the
road.
A
special
code
(密码)
from
a
pilot’s
license
is
needed
to
get
the
wings
to
unfold.
Interested
pilots
(yes,
you
need
to
be
a
licensed
flyer
or
a
driver
with
a
pilot’s
license
to
buy
one)
can
get
an
order
of
the
flying
car
(or
the
high
way
plane)
for
￡6,500.
It
is
planned
to
be
finished
towards
the
end
of
the
year.
Title:
The
world’s
first
flying
car
Questions
Answers
1.
What’s
it
like
It
has
four
and
two
foldable
wings.
It
is
19
feet
long
and
a
little
than
a
normal
car.
2.
What’s
its
speed
It
can
run
60
per
hour
on
the
highway
and
115
miles
per
hour
in
the
sky.
3.
What’s
the
power
of
it
It’s
to
use
rocket
fuels.It’s
powered
by
the
100
horsepower
Rotax
912S
engine.
4.
What’s
the
it
You
can
get
the
flying
car
for
￡127,000.
5.
Who
can
buy
it
and
how
A
who
has
got
a
pilot’s
license
can
order
it
for￡6,500
and
then
get
it
after
paying
the
of
the
money.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
Dr.
Jack
Todd
is
very
interested
in
clean
water.
1
so
it’s
natural
that
he
is
a
developer
of
a
small
and
affordable
system
(系统）to
clean
wastewater.
His
“Living
Machine”
can
clean
wastewater
in
your
home
or
in
your
business.
2
The
wastewater
goes
into
a
big
plastic
tank
where
bacteria
(细菌）start
to
break
down
the
waste.
3
the
water
is
brought
into
a
greenhouse
filled
with
plants
and
fish.
With
the
help
of
sunlight,
the
plants
and
animals
remove
more
chemicals
from
the
water,
making
it
cleaner.
Then
the
water
can
be
reused
for
washing
or
bathing.
4
but
the
water
is
clean
enough
for
watering
the
flowers,
washing
the
dog,
or
even
for
bathing
or
swimming.
The
advantage
of
this
technology
is
that
it
is
affordable
and
good
for
the
environment,
5
It
can
help
to
use
less
fresh
water,
and
it
can
help
keep
the
water
supply
unpolluted.
A.
If
enough
homes
and
businesses
use
“Living
Machines”.B.
People
like
to
plant
trees
around
their
houses,C.
He
is
also
interested
in
saving
money,D.
It
cannot
be
used
for
drinking
or
cooking,E.
The
“Living
Machine”
is
a
system
for
cleaning
wastewater.F.
A
few
days
later
after
it
is
dealt
with,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Today,
I’ll
talk
about
the
problems
we
have
these
days.
The
problems
of
dogs
and
the
falling
from
windows
are
getting
1
.
We
have
received
a
lot
of
letters
2
problems,
so
it’s
time
to
work
out
these
problems.
Some
dogs
aren’t
taken
good
care
of,
and
they
3
make
mess
(粪便)
on
road
gardens.
This
makes
our
community
dirty.
I’d
like
to
tell
the
dog-owners
that
4
behavior
is
too
bad,
and
they
are
always
making
people
feel
unhappy.
Some
people
throw
rubbish
out
of
the
5
.
It’s
dangerous
because
falling
objects
may
hurt
6
.
You
know,
it
is
against
the
law.
We
should
7
a
notice
to
teach
people
not
to
do
so.
If
it’s
found,
we’ll
record
the
names
and
8
of
those
people.
Then,
a
written
warning
will
be
sent
to
their
homes
and
they
will
9
by
law.
A
safe
and
comfortable
living
environment
is
important
to
us.
10
we
try
our
best
to
care
for
our
community,
it
will
be
a
good
place
to
live
in.
(
)
1.
A.
easier
B.
worse
C.
better
(
)
2.
A.
about
B.
except
C.
without
(
)
3.
A.
busily
B.
suddenly
C.
freely
(
)
4.
A.
his
B.
their
C.
our
(
)
5.
A.
windows
B.
doors
C.
cars
(
)
6.
A.
other
B.
the
other
C.
others
(
)
7.
A.
put
up
B.
look
up
C.
put
away
(
)
8.
A.
hobbies
B.
addresses
C.
experiences
(
)
9.
A.
punish
B.
be
punishing
C.
be
punished
(
)
10.
A.
If
B.
Before
C.
Although
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Tony
Makes
a
Difference
Tony
has
always
loved
going
to
the
beach.
He
spends
as
much
time
there
as
he
can.
One
day,
Tony
and
his
mom
grabbed
their
beach
gear
and
headed
to
the
shore.
It
was
a
bright,
sunny
day.
The
beach
was
full
by
the
time
they
got
there.
It
seemed
like
everyone
had
the
same
idea
today.
When
they
found
a
spot,
Tony
sat
down
and
began
to
relax.
Soon
Tony
noticed
something
strange.
There
was
an
empty
water
bottle
in
the
sand.
Then,
a
paper
bag
was
blowing
down
by
the
water.
People
had
littered
all
over
the
beach!
Tony
was
mad.
His
mom
explained
that
a
lot
of
people
litter
instead
of
using
garbage
cans.
If
Tony
wanted
it
to
stop,
he
would
have
to
work
to
save
the
beach.
He
worked
hard.
Tony
got
a
group
to
help
clean
up.
He
put
up
signs
saying
“______”
and
got
his
town
to
add
more
garbage
cans
in
the
area.
Most
of
all,
he
let
people
know
how
bad
littering
is
for
the
environment.
Tony
worked
hard
to
make
a
difference!
(
)
1.
What
was
the
weather
like
on
that
day
A.
Rainy.
B.
Cloudy.
C.
Sunny.
(
)
2.
Who
went
to
the
beach
with
Tony
A.
His
best
friend.
B.
His
dog.
C.
His
mom.
(
)
3.
What
problem
did
Tony
notice
at
the
beach
A.
It
started
to
rain.
B.
People
had
littered
on
the
beach.
C.
He
lost
his
beach
ball.
(
)
4.
What
did
the
signs
that
Tony
put
up
say
A.
No
Swimming.
B.
No
Food
or
Drinks.
C.
No
Littering.
(
)
5.
What
is
Tony
like
according
to
the
passage
A.
Hard-working
and
caring.
B.
Hard-working
but
careless.
C.
Outgoing
but
lazy.
B
Ladies
and
gentlemen,
I
returned
to
this
year
in
a
time
machine.
In
the
year
2500,
we
are
able
to
travel
through
time
to
any
year
in
the
history
of
the
earth.
This
year
is
your
last
chance
to
change
your
lifestyle
to
save
the
earth.
Beginning
in
the
middle
of
the
20th
century,
a
few
people
were
worried
about
polluting
the
earth’s
water
and
air,
but
most
people
did
not
change
their
ways
of
life.
Instead,
they
continued
to
pour
dangerous
chemicals
and
other
waste
into
lakes
and
seas,
to
drive
more
and
more
cars
and
trucks,
and
to
cut
down
trees.
By
the
year
2200,
the
earth’s
water
was
completely
polluted.
People
could
no
longer
drink
water,
and
they
had
to
use
other
types
of
liquids.
Scientists
said
that
in
the
future
there
might
be
too
many
people
on
the
earth.
But
not
enough
was
done.
So,
by
the
year
2300,
there
were
so
many
people
that
food
became
scarce.
There
was
no
water
to
grow
food
and
all
of
the
fish
in
the
lakes
and
seas
died
because
of
pollution.
Terrible
wars
broke
out
between
the
rich
and
the
poor.
Scientists
were
working
very
hard
to
find
another
planet
in
space
where
humans
could
live.
By
the
year
2400,
the
air
was
too
polluted
for
humans
to
breathe.
So
we
had
to
leave
the
earth.
But
only
the
rich
were
able
to
leave.
Where
did
we
go
Nowhere.
You
see
scientists
did
not
find
another
safe
planet,
so
now
we
must
travel
around
the
universe
in
our
spaceships.
We
are
still
looking
for
a
place
to
call
our
home.
So,
it
is
up
to
you
to
change
history.
There
is
still
hope.
You
must
change
your
lifestyle
now,
before
it
is
too
late.
(
)
6.
Which
problem
is
not
talked
about
in
Paragraph
2
(第二段)
A.
Water.
B.
Air.
C.
Food.
(
)
7.
What’s
the
meaning
of
“scarce”
in
the
passage
A.
昂贵的.
B.
充足的.
C.
缺乏的.
(
)
8.
Who
could
leave
the
earth
by
the
year
2400
A.
The
rich.
B.
The
poor.
C.
Scientists.
(
)
9.
Which
of
the
following
is
true
A.
Only
a
few
people
changed
their
lifestyles
in
the
20th
century.
B.
There
wasn’t
enough
water
for
people
to
drink
by
the
year
2200.
C.
All
the
animals
died
because
of
pollution
by
the
year
2300.
(
)
10.
What’s
the
best
title
of
the
passage
A.
Stop
polluting
B.
Change
or
leave
C.
Look
for
a
new
home
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
As
we
all
know,
the
environment
around
us
is
getting
worse
and
worse.
In
some
places
we
can’t
see
fish
1
in
the
river
or
trees
on
the
hills.
Some
people
even
have
no
clean
water
to
drink.
Recently,
a
new
lifestyle
called
low
carbon
life
is
2
every
corner
of
our
country.
The
meanings
of
low
carbon
are
3
energy
and
no
waste.
It
is
such
an
important
project
that
I
can’t
wait
to
express
my
ideas
on
how
to
promote
it.
First，we
should
4
a
no-car
day
every
week
in
our
school.
Because
cars
not
only
cause
serious
air
pollution
but
also
waste
energy.
5
the
no-car
day,
neither
students
nor
teachers
are
allowed
to
drive
to
school.
At
the
same
time，just
walk
or
run.
Use
our
6
and
enjoy
the
fun.
Second,
we
had
better
not
use
plastic
bags
7
.
No
one
can
stand
the
“white
pollution”,
so
it
is
wise
to
use
cloth
bags
which
can
be
used
again
and
again.
Finally,
one
thing
8
we
should
keep
in
mind
is
that
every
big
thing
comes
from
the
small
details.
So,
as
students,
we
ought
to
turn
9
the
lights
the
moment
we
leave,
use
10
sides
of
the
paper,
and
reuse
our
textbooks
and
so
on.
All
in
all,
it
weighs
greatly
for
all
of
us
to
put
the
low
carbon
lifestyle
into
practice.
Just
set
our
mind
to
these：no-car
days,
no
plastic
bags,
and
no
waste.
Let’s
do
it
now.
(
)
1.
A.
swims
B.
swimming
C.
to
swim
(
)
2.
A.
spreading
B.
moving
C.
living
(
)
3.
A.
below
B.
high
C.
low
(
)
4.
A.
set
off
B.
set
up
C.
put
on
(
)
5.
A.
In
B.
At
C.
On
(
)
6.
A.
bikes
B.
cars
C.
legs
(
)
7.
A.
any
more
B.
no
more
C.
no
longer
(
)
8.
A.
who
B.
what
C.
that
(
)
9.
A.
up
B.
off
C.
down
(
)
10.
A.
both
B.
each
C.
every
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Water
is
the
most
important
in
our
lives.
Not
many
people
understand
this
but
it’s
quite
true.
The
human
body
can
go
without
food
for
a
long
time.
We’ve
got
many
examples
for
this.
Yet
two
or
three
days
without
water
can
usually
make
people
die.
Man
can’t
live
without
water.
Many
people
don’t
understand
how
much
water
the
human
body
needs
to
work
well,
and
many
people,
especially
young
people,
do
not
drink
enough
water,
even
in
very
hot
weather.
About
two
thirds
of
our
body
is
water.
When
we
do
sports,
some
of
the
water
will
get
away
from
our
body.
If
we
don’t
drink
some
water,
our
body
won’t
have
enough
water.
And
if
we
don’t
have
enough
water,
we’ll
feel
tired
and
many
of
us
will
get
ill.
So
you
know
how
important
water
is
to
us.
But
at
present
we
face
water
crisis
(危机).
Water
is
becoming
less
and
less.
So,
we
should
protect
water
resources
(资源)
and
try
our
best
to
save
water
in
our
daily
life.
Here
are
some
tips
for
saving
water:
1.
Turn
off
the
tap
(水龙头)
in
time.
2.
Take
shorter
showers.
3.
Don’t
let
water
run
while
washing
your
face
and
reuse
the
water
after
we
finish
washing.
4.
Encourage
your
friends
and
neighbors
to
join
in
the
action
of
saving
water.
(
)
1.
Nobody
can
live
without
water.
(
)
2.
About
one
third
of
our
body
is
water
(
)
3.
If
one
doesn’t
have
enough
water,
he’ll
feel
tired
and
may
get
ill.
(
)
4.
We’d
better
take
longer
showers
and
let
water
run
while
washing.
(
)
5.
It’s
our
duty
to
protect
water
resources
and
save
water.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
(H
for
Henry;
J
for
Janet)
H:
Hi,
Janet.
Would
you
like
to
help
1
the
environment
J:
I
don’t
know.
2
can
I
do
H:
Well,
first,
you
can
start
by
turning
3
the
lights.
J:
Yes.
That’s
easy.
Sometimes
I
turn
on
the
lights
4
thinking.
What’s
next
H:
Second,
you
can
ride
a
5
.
Don’t
take
a
bus
or
a
taxi
6
you
don’t
have
to.
J:
That
will
save
money,
too.
What
7

H:
Third,
try
to
8
paper.
J:
Mm.
We
get
a
lot
of
paper
at
home.
Good
idea.
H:
The
fourth
idea
is
turning
off
the
9
when
you’re
not
using
it.
J:
You
mean,
when
I
have
shampoo
in
my
hair
H:
Yes.
We
have
to
save
water.
Every
minute
helps.
And
fifth,
take
a
10
when
you
go
shopping.
Don’t
use
plastic
bags.
J:
OK.
My
parents
do
most
of
the
shopping.
I’ll
tell
them.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
from
for
quick
where
cause
other
when
way
as
little
but
health
Bicycles
or
cars
In
China
many
people
ride
bikes.
They
think
outdoor
cycling
will
make
them
1
and
strong
and
will
make
the
pollution
problem
2
serious.
Americans
are
a
people
on
the
wheel.
3
you
go,
you’ll
see
cars.
In
fact,
they
are
becoming
a
group
of
machine-bound
people.
4
does
this
mean
we
should
give
up
cars
for
bicycles
No.
We
should
prevent
people
5
using
cars
as
much
as
possible
to
save
our
environment
and
energy.
Everyone
wants
to
reduce
pollution,
6
the
pollution
problem
is
very
serious.
The
exhaust
(排气)
from
cars
7
a
large
percentage
of
all
air
pollution.
On
the
8
hand,
the
need
for
energy
increases
every
day,
and
some
sources
(来源)
of
energy
are
being
used
up
very
9
.
Oil
will
last
for
no
more
than
40
years,
while
coal
could
last
300
years.
The
10
we’re
heading
is
towards
a
world
where
people
are
going
to
be
cold
and
hungry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
We
all
need
a
healthy
environment,
but
we
produce
waster
every
day
and
it
does
harm
to
our
environment.
Though
we
are
young,
we
can
still
do
something
to
help.
In
fact,
even
the
simplest
everyday
activities
can
make
a
real
difference
to
the
environment.
Here
are
some
ideas
for
you
to
live
a
green
life.
Remember
these
three
words;
reduce,
reuse
and
recycle.
Reduce
means
“use
less”.
Don’t
waste
things.
This
saves
money
and
reduces
pollution
and
waste
going
into
the
environment.
Before
we
buy
something
new,
think
if
it
is
really
necessary
or
maybe
the
old
one
will
be
just
as
good!
When
we
do
buy
thing,
choose
local
products
if
possible,
and
try
not
to
buy
too
many
things
from
abroad.
Reuse
mean
“use
again”.
Use
things
for
as
long
as
possible.
When
we
buy
things,
make
sure
that
they
last
a
long
time.
We
should
take
care
of
them
so
that
they
will
last,
and
we
should
repair
them
if
we
can
instead
of
throwing
them
away
and
buying
new
ones.
Don’t
use
a
paper
cup
or
a
paper
bag.
It’s
better
to
use
a
china
cup
and
a
lunch
box
because
you
can
use
them
again.
Recycle
means
“change
things
into
something
else”.
Although
it
takes
energy
to
change
something
into
something
else,
it’s
better
than
throwing
things
away
or
burning
them.
Find
out
what
can
be
recycled
in
your
neighbourhood
and
take
part
in
recycling
programmes.
We
should
also
buy
products
made
from
recycled
materials,
such
as
recycled
paper,
to
help
save
trees.
Title:
1
to
Live
a
Green
Life
We
produce
waste
every
day
and
it
is
2
to
us.
We
can
do
something
to
help.
Ideas
Does
Don’ts
To
3
Use
less
Try
to
save
something
Don’t
buy
too
many
things
from
foreign
4
.
To
reuse
Use
5
Use
things
for
us
long
as
possible.
Buy
things
that
last
long.
Take
care
of
things
or
6
the
old
things.
Don’t
use
7
cups
or
bags.
To
recycle
Change
things
into
something
8
Join
in
recycling
programmes.
Buy
9
made
from
recycled
materials.
Don’t
10
things
away
or
burn
them.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
Australia
has
a
lot
of
lovely
animals.
A.
The
kangaroo
is
the
symbol
of
Australia.
B.
They
can
go
over
nine
metres
in
one
jump!
C.
They
are
on
TV,
in
books
and
in
the
shops.
D.
The
most
famous
ones
are
kangaroos
and
koalas.
E.
The
government
even
wants
to
put
them
on
passports
(护照).
F.
They
don’t
walk,
they
jump.
G.
They
can
jump
at
up
to
74
kilometres
per
hour.
H.
The
babies
stay
inside
to
get
milk
and
keep
warm.
I.
Kangaroo
mothers
have
pouches
(育儿袋)
to
carry
their
babies.
J.
Kangaroos
are
everywhere
in
Australia.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
London
is
such
a
wonderful
city.
It
is
very
large.
The
Thames
River
runs
1
the
city
from
west
to
east.
So
the
city
has
2
parts:
the
South
and
the
North.
In
the
North,
there
are
important
buildings,
shops,
big
parks
and
interesting
places.
The
weather
in
London
is
good.
In
winter
it
is
not
very
cold
and
in
summer
it
is
not
very
hot,
3
the
city
is
near
the
sea.
People
say
4
London
is
a
foggy
city
and
it
often
rains.
It
is
true.
Last
year,
when
I
5
in
London
I
met
one
of
the
6
fogs
in
years.
You
could
hardly
see
your
hand
in
front
of
your
face.
Cars
and
buses
moved
along
with
their
lights
on.
When
evening
fell,
the
weather
7
even
worse.
The
fog
was
as
thick
as
milk.
8
the
buses
and
cars
stopped.
I
happened
9
an
important
meeting
on
the
other
side
of
the
town,
but
it
was
impossible
to
find
a
car.
I
had
to
get
there
10
.
(
)
1.
A.
about
B.
through
C.
in
(
)
2.
A.
two
B.
four
C.
six
(
)
3.
A.
because
B.
so
C.
but
(
)
4.
A.
what
B.
where
C.
that
(
)
5.
A.
am
B.
was
C.
were
(
)
6.
A.
thick
B.
thicker
C.
thickest
(
)
7.
A.
become
B.
got
C.
turn
(
)
8.
A.
All
B.
Each
C.
Every
(
)
9.
A.
to
have
B.
have
C.
having
(
)
10.
A.
by
car
B.
by
bus
C.
on
foot
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
FLY
AWAY
HOLIDAYS
BEIJING
TRAVEL
COMPANY
Beijing,
China
Best
four
days
in
SingaporeBook
online:
www.
Beijingtour.
com
or
call：
010
-62617788
Beijing—Singapore
MIRAMER
HOTEL
Restaurant
&
Cafe
Swimming
Pool
Movie
Theater
and
KTV
Clothing
Store
Bowling
and
Chess
Service
Ping-pong
Room
Reading
Room
Day
1:
Take
a
bus
tour
of
the
island.Evening—see
a
show
at
the
Neptune
Theater.Day
2:
Morning—visit
the
Handicraft
(手工艺品)
Center
and
the
National
Museum.Afternoon—take
the
cable
car
to
Sentosa
Island.Day
3:
Free
for
shopping.Day
4:
Take
a
walking
tour
of
old
Singapore
in
the
morning.
Afternoon—boat
trip
around
the
island.
Departure
Date
&
PriceJuly
1
3,
220
July
12
3,
100
July
23
2,
950
Please
choose
and
book
early.
Business
HoursWeekdays:
24
hoursWeekends:
8:
00
a.
m—6:00
p.
m.
(
)
1.
You
can’t
______
in
MIRAMER
HOTEL.
A.
play
basketball
B.
see
a
movie
C.
read
books
(
)
2.
If
you
are
interested
in
visiting
museums,
you’ll
have
a
good
time
on
______.
A.
Day
1
B.
Day
2
C.
Day
3
(
)
3.
It
will
cost
you
_______,
if
you
want
to
travel
on
July
1.
A.

2,950
B.

3,100
C.

3,220
(
)
4.
You
can
book
the
trip
at
_______
on
the
weekends.
A.
7:
30
B.
10:20
a.m.
C.
8:00
p.
m.
(
)
5.
How
many
kinds
of
transportation
are
mentioned
(提及)
in
the
passage
A.
3.
B.
4.
C.
5.
B
Kunming
is
the
capital
of
Yunnan.
It’s
a
city
with
a
long
history.
Kunming
has
a
population
of
more
than
5,000,000.
Though
the
weather
in
Yunnan
changes
from
place
to
place,
Kunming
is
famous
for
her
beautiful
weather.
It’s
neither
too
hot
in
summer
nor
too
cold
in
winter.
That’s
why
more
and
more
people
like
to
travel
and
even
to
live
here.
You
can
see
that
great
changes
have
taken
place
here.
A
lot
of
tall
buildings,
cinemas
and
hospitals
have
been
put
up.
You
can
cross
the
streets
over
footbridges
in
the
city.
You
can
buy
whatever
you
want
in
shops
and
supermarkets
in
or
around
the
city.
People’s
lives
are
becoming
better
and
better.
At
weekend
or
on
holiday,
people
like
to
relax
themselves
in
different
places
and
in
different
ways.
In
winter,
people,
especially
old
people,
would
like
to
climb
the
Western
Hills.
From
the
top
of
the
Hills,
you
can
have
a
good
look
at
the
beautiful
scenery
of
Kunming.
Far
away
from
the
Hills,
you
can
enjoy
the
Sleeping
Beauty
among
the
Hills.
After
supper,
families
take
a
walk
along
the
bank
of
Dianchi
Lake.
The
Golden
Temple
and
EXPO
Garden
(世博览园)
are
two
famous
places
of
interest
in
the
north
of
the
city.
EXPO
Garden
is
known
to
people
both
at
home
and
abroad.
You
can
spend
a
whole
day
visiting
the
world
famous
garden.
A
little
farther
away
from
the
southeast
of
the
city,
a
special
forest
welcomes
you.
It
is
not
a
tree
forest,
but
a
stone
forest.
So
it
is
called
the
Stone
Forest.
People
in
Kunming
are
very
friendly.
They
often
invite
their
friends
home
to
try
delicious
food,
like
rice
noodles.
If
you
want
to
know
more
about
Kunming
and
taste
her
food,
please
visit
her
yourself!
(
)
6.
What’s
the
population
of
Kunming
A.
Over
five
million.
B.
Over
five
thousand.
C.
Over
five
billion.
(
)
7.
The
weather
in
Yunnan
is
______.
A.
the
same
in
different
places
B.
neither
too
hot
nor
too
cold
C.
different
in
different
places
(
)
8.
The
Sleeping
Beauty
is
the
name
of
a
______.
A.
person
B.
hill
C.
shop
(
)
9.
______
is
known
to
people
all
over
the
world.
A.
The
Western
Hills
B.
The
Stone
Forest
C.
EXPO
Garden
(
)
10.
The
writer
of
this
passage
wants
to
______.
A.
invite
tourists
to
Kunming
B.
visit
Kunming
C.
taste
her
food
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Mrs.
Li
and
Grandma
were
going
to
Los
Angeles,
USA
that
Sunday
to
see
Uncle
Mike.
He
1
in
Los
Angeles
for
six
years.
Mrs.
Li
and
Grandma
had
never
been
to
another
country.
They
planned
to
stay
in
Los
Angeles
for
two
weeks.
They
would
not
come
back
2
the
end
of
the
month.
They
had
bought
their
air
tickets
already.
They
had
done
a
lot
of
things,
but
not
3
.
They
had
not
packed
their
suitcases
4
.
Grandma
had
bought
Uncle
Mike
many
presents.
She
had
bought
5
T-shirts
and
several
paintings.
She
had
also
bought
some
tea
and
dried
mushrooms.
“Have
you
got
enough
space
in
your
suitcase ”
asked
Mrs.
Li.
“Yes,
because
I’ve
only
got
a
small
amount
of
tea,
not
6
.”
said
Grandma.
“How
about
the
dried
mushrooms
How
many
packets
have
you
got ”
asked
Mrs.
Li.
“I’ve
got
7
packets,
not
too
many.
Don’t
worry,
my
dear.”
replied
Grandma.
“But
I
can’t
help
8
.
I
haven’t
got
enough
room
in
my
suitcase.”
said
Mrs.
Li.
“If
so,
you
can
put
some
of
your
things
in
my
suitcase.
My
suitcase
is
larger
than
9
.”
said
Grandma.
Then
Mrs.
Li
put
part
of
her
things
into
Grandma’s
suitcase
and
they
left
10
.
(
)
1.
A.
lived
B.
have
lived
C.
had
lived
(
)
2.
A.
by
B.
until
C.
in
(
)
3.
A.
everything
B.
anything
C.
nothing
(
)
4.
A.
ever
B.
never
C.
yet
(
)
5.
A.
a
lot
of
B.
lot
of
C.
a
lot
(
)
6.
A.
too
much
B.
too
many
C.
much
too
(
)
7.
A.
a
little
B.
a
lot
of
C.
a
few
(
)
8.
A.
to
worry
B.
worrying
C.
worry
(
)
9.
A.
you
B.
your
C.
yours
(
)
10.
A.
happy
B.
happily
C.
unhappy
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Bill
was
going
to
visit
Wang
Dawei
in
Chongqing
for
several
days.
Before
he
left
America,
Bill
tried
to
learn
about
Chinese
food
and
Chinese
ways
of
doing
things.
He
wanted
to
be
polite.
He
learned
that
most
people
in
China
eat
rice,
drink
tea,
and
take
off
their
shoes
when
they
go
into
a
friend’s
apartment.
Bill
even
learned
to
use
chopsticks.
At
the
same
time,
Wang
Dawei
learned
about
American
food
and
American
ways
of
doing
things.
He
wanted
to
be
friendly.
When
Bill
came
to
Wang’s
house,
Dawei
told
him
to
keep
his
shoes
on.
Later
they
went
out
for
dinner.
They
ate
pizza
and
drank
Coke.
The
next
few
days,
they
had
breakfast
in
a
coffee
shop
and
ate
hamburgers
in
a
fast-food
restaurant.
On
his
way
back
to
America,
Bill
was
thinking
about
why
he
never
ate
rice
or
drank
tea
or
ate
with
chopsticks.
He
never
took
off
his
shoes
when
he
visited
Wang’s
family.
He
thought
that
living
in
China
was
just
like
living
in
America.
(
)
1.
Bill
learned
about
Chinese
food
and
other
things
before
coming
to
China.
(
)
2.
Bill
knew
most
Chinese
eat
rice,
drink
tea
and
wear
their
shoes
in
their
houses.
(
)
3.
Wang
Dawei
was
friendly
to
Bill,
so
they
went
to
the
restaurant
to
eat
Chinese
food.
(
)
4.
Finally
Bill
didn’t
have
Chinese
food
at
all.
(
)
5.
Wang
Dawei
made
Bill
feel
at
home
at
last.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
A:
What
are
you
going
to
do
after
you
return
1
Paris
B:
I’m
going
to
2
in
the
city.
A:
What
are
you
going
to
do
B:
I’m
going
to
work
3
my
father
at
the
store.
In
the
evening,
I’ll
read
books.
A:
Have
you
4
worked
at
the
store
B:
No,
5
I
can
learn
to
work.
What
are
you
going
to
do
this
summer
A:
I’m
going
to
the
farm.
I’ve
been
there
6
four
summers.
B:
I’ve
never
been
there
7
.
Maybe
it’s
a
good
8
.
What
do
you
do
there
A:
I
work
in
the
fields.
B:
That
9
wonderful.
A:
Of
course
it
is
wonderful
B:
Well,
goodbye,
Mary.
Enjoy
10
!
A:
You
too,
Peter.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
they
build
great
place
park
interest
visit
one
because
of
come
Melbourne
is
in
Australia.
It
is
a
beautiful
city
with
huge
gardens,
great
1
and
many
amazing
buildings.
Many
people
come
to
2
it
every
year.
Melbourne
is
also
an
ancient
city
in
Australia.
It
has
a(n)
3
history
of
more
than
170
years.
The
4
people
came
in
1835,
and
in
the
1850s,
gold
was
discovered.
5
this,
Melbourne
became
a
very
rich
city.
Many
new
6
were
built
at
that
time.
And
today,
Melbourne
is
one
of
the
world’s
7
cities.
It
is
known
for
its
beauty
and
its
famous
universities.
It
is
also
Australia’s
top
city
for
sports.
Many
of
8
are
very
popular.
For
example,
young
people
are
mad
about
football
here.
In
1956,
the
Olympic
Games
9
to
the
city,
and
for
the
first
time
they
were
showed
live
on
TV
around
the
world.
Melbourne
is
a
nice
10
and
you
can
always
have
great
fun
here.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Amanda
is
an
American
filmmaker
and
actress.
She
came
to
China
three
years
ago
to
study
Performance
at
Beijing
Film
Academy.
Last
month,
she
moved
to
Japan
to
study
Economics
at
the
University
of
Tokyo.
On
June
10th,
she
returned
to
the
USA.
She
chatted
with
her
parents
about
the
cultural
differences
between
the
two
countries.
“The
people
in
both
countries
are
very
friendly
to
foreigners.
But
they
have
different
cultures.
For
example,
when
I
spoke
Chinese
in
China,
the
people
there
always
showed
surprise
on
their
faces.
But
when
I
came
to
Japan,
I
found
it
was
opposite.
Most
local
people
there
hoped
I
could
talk
with
them
in
Japanese,
though
I
was
not
good
at
it,”
she
said.
Amanda
thought
this
might
have
something
to
do
with
the
fact
that
the
western
group
in
Japan
is
older
than
the
one
in
China.
They
have
stayed
in
Japan
for
a
long
time.
And
most
of
them
speak
Japanese
well.
But
Westerners
in
China
are
still
quite
a
new
group.
They’re
usually
treated
as
guests
and
tourists.
In
Japan
In
China
Time
Amanda
spent
About
one
month
About
1
years
Subjects
Amanda
2　
Economics
Performance
Different
3
The
Japanese
expected
the
Westerners
to
speak
Japanese.
The
Chinese
felt
4
when
the
Westerners
spoke
Chinese.
The
reason
of
the
cultural
difference
The
western
group
in
China
is
5
than
the
one
in
Japan.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
1
Many
hikers
like
to
hike
in
the
countryside,
in
forests
and
in
mountains.
Just
walking
for
fun
is
the
first
kind
of
hiking.
Many
people
like
to
hike
in
city
parks
or
just
on
the
sidewalks.
A
hike
can
take
a
few
hours
or
weeks.
For
most
hiking,
people
just
need
clothes
and
shoes
that
are
good
for
the
weather.
2
As
you
get
stronger,
you
can
go
on
a
whole
night
hike.
Later
you
can
go
longer
than
that.
3
4
You
should
always
have
one
or
two
friends
with
you.
It’s
also
a
good
idea
to
carry
a
map.
Backpacking
is
another
kind
of
hiking.
People
carry
food,
clothes
and
other
things
on
their
backs
in
a
pack.
Backpackers
can
stay
many
days
in
places
where
there
is
no
food
to
buy.
5
Now,
put
on
your
hiking
shoes
and
take
a
hike.
A.
You
can
make
your
hike
last
for
days
or
weeks.B.
They
carry
what
they
need
on
their
backs.C.
Many
people
like
to
hike
in
the
countryside.D.
At
the
beginning
hikers
should
start
with
walks
that
they
can
do
in
one
day.E.
Hiking
is
good
for
exercise
and
fun.F.
For
safety,
hikers
should
hike
with
someone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Canada
is
the
second
largest
country
is
the
world.
It
is
over
7,000
kilometers
from
the
1
coast
to
the
east.
It
2
six
time
zones.
3
it
is
9
a.
m.
in
Vancouver
on
the
west
coast,
it
is
1:30
p.
m.
in
St
John’s
on
the
east
coast.
English
and
French
4
the
two
main
languages
in
Canada.
About
60
percent
of
5
people
speak
English,
and
about
25
percent
speak
French.
More
6
70
percent
of
its
population
live
in
cities
near
the
US
border
(边境).
Ottawa
is
the
capital.
Every
year
millions
of
tourists
go
there
to
7
museums
and
take
part
in
the
cultural
activities.
Toronto
is
the
largest
city
of
the
country
8
about
2.5
million
people.
Montreal
is
9
second
biggest
French-speaking
city
in
the
world.
The
maple
leaf
is
the
national
symbol
of
Canada.
The
Canadian
flag
has
a
red
maple
leaf
on
a
red
10
white
background.
(
)
1.
A.
west
B.
east
C.
south
(
)
2.
A.
is
B.
had
C.
has
(
)
3.
A.
Which
B.
When
C.
Where
(
)
4.
A.
are
B.
is
C.
will
be
(
)
5.
A.
their
B.
his
C.
its
(
)
6.
A.
up
B.
over
C.
than
(
)
7.
A.
see
B.
visit
C.
look
(
)
8.
A.
with
B.
for
C.
from
(
)
9.
A.
a
B.
an
C.
the
(
)
10.
A.
or
B.
and
C.
but
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Singapore’s
public
transport
system
is
one
of
the
best
in
the
world,
so
you
should
have
no
problem
finding
your
way
around
like
a
local.
There
are
three
main
forms
of
public
transport
that
you
would
find
in
any
other
major
city－trains,
buses
and
taxis.
◆TRAINS
Trains
run
from
6:00
am
to
midnight.
Single
trip
tickets
start
at
80
cents.
If
you
buy
an
EZ-Link
card
for
$15,
you
can
ride
the
trains
and
buses
as
you
like.
If
you
need
more
information,
just
call
Transit
Link
on
1800
767
4333.
◆BUSES
There
are
several
bus
services
in
Singapore
and
fares
start
at
80
cents.
Be
sure
always
ask
the
driver
the
cost
of
your
ticket
as
he
can
not
give
change.
If
you
need
help,
just
call
Transit
Link
on
1800
767
4333.
◆TAXIS
There
are
three
main
taxi
companies—City
Cab
(6552
2222),
Comfort
(6552
1111)
and
Tibs
(6552
8888).
Booking
can
also
be
easily
by
calling
the
numbers
listed
above.
◆RENTAL
CARS
Driving
in
Singapore
is
a
pleasure
and
if
you
liked
to
travel
at
your
own
pace,
renting
a
car
is
a
good
choice.
Renting
takes
away
the
hassle
of
getting
to
places
around
Singapore.
Just
sit
back
and
enjoy
the
city.
It
also
means
you’ll
get
to
see
a
lot
more
that
a
trains
or
a
bus
won’t
let
you
see.
For
car
rental,
call
Avis
on
+
65
6737
1668.
(
)
1.
By
an
EZ-Link
card,
you
can
take
______.
A.
both
buses
and
trains
B.
only
trains
C.
both
buses
and
taxis
(
)
2.
If
you
want
to
rent
a
car
in
Singapore,
you
can
call
______.
A.
City
Cab
(6552
2222)
B.
Comfort
(6552
1111)
C..
Avis
(+65
6737
1668)
(
)
3.
When
you
take
a
bus
there,
always
remember
to
______.
A.
take
your
own
license
with
you
B.
ask
the
driver
how
much
your
ticket
is
C.
buy
the
bus
map
of
Singapore
(
)
4.
What
does
the
word
“hassle”
mean
A.
Trouble.
B.
Interest.
C.
View.
(
)
5.
What
do
you
know
about
traveling
in
Singapore
from
the
passage
A.
A
local
has
no
trouble
finding
his
way
around.
B.
It’s
much
cheaper
to
go
around
by
bus
than
by
train.
C.
It’s
very
convenient
for
visitors
to
travel
in
Singapore.
B
A
Short
Beach
Park
in
Stratford,
CT,
you
can
do
many
things.
For
example,
you
can
swim
and
fish
and
you
can
also
take
some
wonderful
pictures
and
put
them
in
an
album.
Short
Beach
Park
is
located
(位于)
on
Dorne
Drive.
The
rates
(费用)
vary,
so
you’d
better
compare
them
before
you
go
there.
You
also
need
to
get
some
information
so
that
you
can
get
there
by
taking
the
quickest
route.
Remember
that
traffic
will
be
plentiful
during
the
summer
months.
Always
plan
traffic
time
into
your
travel
time
and
you
will
not
get
frustrated
when
you
run
into
it
on
the
way
to
the
beach.
Starting
early
in
the
morning
will
make
you
get
a
good
parking
spot
and
a
good
beach
spot.
If
you
want
to
avoid
(避免)
the
heavy
traffic
and
get
an
excellent
spot
at
the
beach,
going
to
the
beach
in
the
afternoon
is
also
a
great
idea.
At
that
time
most
people
go
home
for
dinner,
so
you
can
choose
the
best
spot
at
the
beach.
The
Short
Beach
Park
has
everything
that
you
need
to
have
a
wonderful
picnic.
It
has
picnic
areas.
You
will
feel
comfortable
at
the
beach
and
be
able
to
relax
yourself
and
enjoy
a
day
in
the
sunshine.
Make
sure
that
you
bring
along
all
of
your
needed
things
like
sunglasses
and
a
sun
hat
to
protect
yourself
from
the
sun’s
rays
(太阳光线).
You
are
sure
to
have
a
great
time
at
the
Short
Beach
Park.
(
)
6.
What
can
we
do
if
we
visit
Short
Beach
Park
according
to
the
first
paragraph
A.
Swim,
play
volleyball
and
take
pictures.
B.
Skate,
fish
and
take
pictures.
C.
Swim,
fish
and
take
pictures.
(
)
7.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“vary”
mean
in
Chinese
A.
增加.
B.
变化.
C.
降低.
(
)
8.
Which
of
the
following
is
NOT
the
writer’s
idea
about
visiting
the
beach
A.
Short
Beach
Park
is
located
on
Dorne
Drive.
B.
Planning
traffic
time
into
your
travel
time.
C.
Going
there
early
in
the
morning.
(
)
9.
If
we
want
to
enjoy
a
day
in
the
sunshine,
what
do
we
need
most
A.
A
lot
of
food
and
drinks.
B.
Some
cool
clothes.
C.
A
pair
of
sunglasses
and
a
sun
hat.
(
)
10.
Where
is
the
passage
most
probably
taken
from
A.
A
dictionary.
B.
An
advertisement.
C.
A
play.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
The
Sea
Life
Center
is
a
really
exciting
place.
There
are
so
many
things
to
1
here
and
everything
is
enjoyable.
It
costs￡3.70
for
grown-ups,
￡2
for
children
and
2
for
over
sixties
and
school
groups.
It’s
3
from
9:00
a.m.
to
4:30
p.m.
every
day
except
25th
and
26th
of
December.
Special
4
include
hourly
feeding
times
for
all
the
different
animals
and
fish,
and
shows
in
the
sea
life
theatre.
5
is
always
there
to
answer
questions
about
what
you’ve
seen.
If
you
are
in
a
group
of
six
or
more
people,
we
6
give
you
a
special
guided
tour
of
the
center.
But
you
need
to
arrange
(安排)
this
at
the
information
desk
when
you
7
.
The
latest
attraction
is
a
big
8
tunnel
you
can
walk
through.
All
around
you,
you
will
see
fish
swimming—sometimes
even
over
your
head.
You
certainly
have
the
9
view
of
the
undersea
world.
Children
love
it
and
it’s
really
amazing
for
grown-ups,
too.
When
you
get
10
,
there
is
a
relaxed
family
dining
room
serving
food.
(
)
1.
A.
see
B.
do
C.
play
(
)
2.
A.
little
B.
few
C.
less
(
)
3.
A.
open
B.
busy
C.
crowded
(
)
4.
A.
changes
B.
programs
C.
attractions
(
)
5.
A.
Someone
B.
Anyone
C.
Everyone
(
)
6.
A.
can
B.
must
C.
should
(
)
7.
A.
return
B.
arrive
C.
leave
(
)
8.
A.
metal
B.
arrive
C.
glass
(
)
9.
A.
clearest
B.
funniest
C.
most
relaxing
(
)
10.
A.
tired
B.
bored
C.
hungry
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Howard
Carter
was
a
famous
explorer
(探险家).
He
loved
to
visit
new
places.
During
his
life,
he
discovered
many
important
and
exciting
things.
Howard
Carter
did
not
go
to
school.
But
he
was
smart
and
wanted
to
learn
the
world
outside
his
hometown.
In
1891,
at
the
age
of
17,
he
went
to
Egypt
by
ship.
By
the
1920s,
he
had
become
an
explorer,
looking
for
the
tombs
of
the
Egyptian
kings.
He
found
several
important
ones.
Inside
the
tombs,
he
found
jewels,
gold
and
10
bodies
of
dead
kings.
These
bodies
are
known
as
mummies
(木乃伊).
In
1922,
Howard
Carter
made
his
most
important
discovery
of
all.
When
Carter’s
team
was
working
at
a
place
near
a
city
called
Luxor,
they
found
the
tomb
of
King
Tutankhamun.
Not
long
after
the
tomb
was
opened,
people
in
Carter’s
team
began
to
get
ill
and
die
strangely.
Within
seven
years,
21
people
who
had
something
to
do
with
the
opening
of
the
tomb
died.
However,
Howard
Carter
lived
on
and
died
at
the
age
of
65.
(
)
1.
Howard
Carter
liked
to
visit
new
places.
(
)
2.
Howard
Carter
was
born
in
1877.
(
)
3.
Howard
Carter
studied
hard
at
his
University.
(
)
4.
Carter’s
team
found
the
tomb
of
King
Tutankhamun
in
1922.
(
)
5.
The
passage
tells
us
Carter’s
school
life.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
（Sally在武汉上学，打算暑假和同学一起出去旅游。现在她正在和旅行社联系。）
Man:
Hello,
Sunlight
Travel.
1
I
help
you
Sally:
Of
course.
I’d
like
some
2
on
vacation
packages,
please.
Man:
Sure.
3
are
you
going
to
visit
Sally:
Well,
I
hope
to
visit
some
places
of
interest
in
Hunan
Province.
Man:
Well,
how
about
Chairman
Mao’s
4

Sally:
Oh,
my
Chinese
friends
have
told
me
that
it’s
really
a
beautiful
5
.
By
the
way,
anywhere
6

Man:
Lei
Feng’s
Hometown
is
in
Hunan,
too.
It
isn’t
7
from
Changsha.
It’s
a
famous
place.
Many
tourists
will
visit
here
this
summer
vacation.
Sally:
How
8
is
that
Man:
800
yuan
each
person.
Sally:
800
yuan
I
think
it’s
a
little
9
.
Man:
But
anybody
can
10
our
prices!
Let’s
make
it,
shall
we
Sally:
Sure.
I
will
call
you
later.
Thank
you!
Man:
You’re
welcome!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
party
make
can
they
call
opposite
mirror
great
window
show
off
The
Hall
of
Mirrors
Can
you
imagine
In
a
hall,
seventeen
large
mirrors
along
the
wall
are
opposite
to
seventeen
large
windows.
Each
mirror
is
1
up
of
483
pieces
of
glass.
This
is
one
of
the
2
miracles
in
the
Palace
of
Versailles.
And
it
is
3
the
Hall
of
Mirrors.
The
French
started
to
build
the
Hall
of
4
in
1678.
At
that
time,
only
the
rich
or
the
noble
could
have
a
good
mirror,
so
the
French
king
Louis
XIV
(路易十四)
wanted
a
room
full
of
mirrors
5
.
In
1686,
the
Hall
of
Mirrors
was
completed.
This
hall
is
huge.
When
you
are
in
it,
you
6
see
where
it
ends.
All
around
you
are
the
large
mirrors
and
7
.
Seventeen
windows
overlook
the
beautiful
scenery
of
the
garden,
and
at
the
same
time,
the
beautiful
scenery
can
be
seen
from
the
8
seventeen
mirrors.
The
French
kings
usually
had
9
and
met
foreign
envoys
in
the
Hall
of
Mirrors.
Under
candlelight,
the
mirrors
looked
like
diamonds,
and
the
hall
glittered
all
night.
Today,
everyone
can
visit
Versailles
and
enjoy
10
in
the
Hall
of
Mirrors.
When
you
are
enjoying
yourself
there,
you
will
feel
like
a
king
or
queen
yourself!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
What
do
young
people
thing
about
places
in
town
We
did
a
survey
of
our
readers
and
this
is
what
we
learned.
All
the
movies
theatres
are
good,
but
the
Screen
City
is
the
best
in
our
town.
It
has
the
biggest
screen
and
the
most
comfortable
seats.
However
Town
Cinema
is
the
cheapest
and
it
has
the
friendliest
service.
The
most
popular
clothing
store
is
Jason’s.
It
has
the
best
quality
clothing.
It’s
also
the
cheapest.
Funky
Fashion
is
the
worst.
It
has
really
bad
service.
As
for
radio
station,
most
people
think
that
Jazz
107.9
FM
is
really
great.
It
has
the
most
exciting
programs.
Survey
Results
of
Places
in
Town
Name
Comments
Screen
City
It
has
the
biggest
screen
and
the
most
1
seats.
2
It’s
the
cheapest
and
it
has
the
friendliest
service.
Jason’s
It
has
the
best
3
clothing.
It’s
also
the
cheapest.
Funky
Fashion
It
has
really
4
.
Jazz
107.9
FM
It
has
the
most
5
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
An
old
man
lived
in
a
side
street
of
a
small
town.
Every
day
after
supper,
some
children
would
play
football
in
the
street.
The
children
were
too
noisy
for
the
old
man
to
have
a
good
rest
…
A.
At
the
end
of
the
first
two
weeks,
the
boys
came
to
the
old
man’s
house,
and
went
away
each
time
happily
with
their
25
cents.
B.
At
the
end
of
the
fifth
week,
the
boys
came
back
again
only
to
get
5
cents.
C.
He
said,
“I
am
so
glad
when
you
play
football
happily.”
This
was
his
explanation.
D.
The
fourth
week,
the
old
man
said
he
was
ill
and
he
had
spent
almost
all
his
on
medicine.
E.
After
that
the
children
never
played
football
in
the
street
again.
F.
The
third
week
when
they
came
back,
however,
the
old
man
said
he
had
nearly
run
out
of
his
money
and
sent
them
away
with
15
cents.
G.
One
evening,
the
old
man
told
the
children
that
he
would
give
them
25
cents
each
week
to
see
them
play
football
in
the
street
at
night.
H.
The
boys
were
thrilled,
for
they
could
hardly
believe
that
they
could
be
paid
to
do
something
they
enjoyed.
I.
He
gave
the
boys
only
10
cents.
J.
The
boys
were
very
unhappy,
but
there
was
not
much
for
them
to
do
about
it
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
A
young
man
was
walking
in
the
desert,
feeling
so
1
.
Just
then
he
suddenly
found
a
spring
of
delicious
and
clear
water.
The
water
was
cool
and
sweet
for
a
man
who
had
expected
it
for
such
a
long
time.
He
drank
a
lot,
and
then
he
filled
his
bottle
so
that
he
could
bring
some
back
to
his
village
and
gave
it
to
his
2
who
had
taught
him
in
middle
school.
After
3
trip,
he
gave
the
water
to
the
old
man
and
he
took
a
deep
drink,
smiled
warmly
and
4
his
student
for
the
sweet
water.
The
young
man
returned
to
his
home
5
a
happy
heart.
Later,
the
teacher
let
6
student
taste
the
water.
He
spat
it
out
at
once,
saying
it
was
terrible.
The
student
said
the
water
had
become
bad
7
the
bottle
was
too
old.
He
couldn’t
find
the
water
was
8
.
The
student
asked
his
teacher,
“Master,
the
water
was
bad
and
it
was
hitter
(苦).
9
did
you
lie
to
him
that
you
liked
it ”
The
teacher
replied.
“You
only
tasted
the
water
while
I
tasted
the
gift.
The
water
which
has
been
put
in
loving
and
kindness
is
not
simply
water.”
10
could
be
sweeter
than
love.
(
)
1.
A.
hungry
B.
thirsty
C.
full
(
)
2.
A.
teacher
B.
doctor
C.
worker
(
)
3.
A.
four
days
B.
fourth
day
C.
four-day
(
)
4.
A.
thanked
B.
argued
C.
loved
(
)
5.
A.
in
B.
with
C.
by
(
)
6.
A.
the
other
B.
another
C.
other
(
)
7.
A.
though
B.
unless
C.
because
(
)
9.
A.
What
B.
How
C.
Why
(
)
10.
A.
Anything
B.
Nothing
C.
Everything
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Have
you
ever
heard
of
“Survival
Holidays”
It
is
for
children
to
go
into
the
lonely
place
for
exciting
activities.
Now
about
1,000
companies
are
allowed
to
take
children
into
the
great
outdoors
without
their
parents.
The
reason
why
people
like
“Survival
Holidays”
is
that
they
think
being
close
to
nature
is
good
for
children.
Many
children
in
big
cities
spend
all
time
watching
TV
and
playing
computer
games.
“Survival
Holidays”
gives
them
an
important
change.
Is
“Survival
Holidays”
a
wonderful
idea
Maybe
it
is.
Children
need
more
free
time
to
play.
They
need
to
be
left
on
their
own,
without
adults
disturbing
(干扰)
them.
Parents
care
too
much
about
their
children.
They
like
to
see
the
children
being
busy
with
activities
that
are
controlled
(控制)
by
adults,
which
causes
many
problems.
Children
don’t
know
what
to
do
when
they
are
in
danger.
Even
something
like
crossing
a
small
river
seems
to
be
a
hard
challenge.
Children
are
not
comfortable
with
danger.
Even
slight
danger
like
getting
their
feet
wet
or
falling
down
seems
very
terrible
to
them.
Many
people
think
the
survival
activities
are
good
for
children.
Even
years
later,
they
will
still
remember
what
they
have
learned.
Some
have
learned
to
stay
calm
in
dangerous
times.
Some
have
learned
how
to
keep
safe.
Others
have
learned
how
to
work
in
a
team.
All
these
skills
will
help
them
a
lot
in
their
lives.
(
)
1.
What
is
“Survival
Holidays”
according
to
the
passage
A.
It
is
summer
holidays.
B.
It
is
a
holiday
to
go
into
the
lonely
place
for
exciting
activities.
C.
It
is
a
kind
of
holidays
to
escape
from
danger.
(
)
2.
Which
children
may
take
part
in
“Survival
Holidays”
A.
Poor
children.
B.
Rich
children.
C.
Children
from
cities.
(
)
3.
What’s
the
main
idea
of
the
last
paragraph
A.
The
reason
people
dislike
“Survival
Holidays”.
B.
The
advantages
of
“Survival
Holidays”.
C.
The
disadvantages
of
“Survival
Holidays”.
(
)
4.
In
a
“Survival
Holidays”
children
can
learn
the
following
except
______.
A.
how
to
get
good
grades
B.
how
to
stay
calm
in
different
times
C.
how
to
keep
safe
when
they
meet
danger
(
)
5.
Which
of
the
following
is
TRUE
according
to
the
passage
A.
No
companies
can
hold
“Survival
Holidays”.
B.
Parents
can
take
part
in
“Survival
Holidays”
with
their
children.
C.
Parents
like
to
keep
their
children
busy
with
activities
controlled
by
adults.
B
Hawaii
is
famous
for
its
beautiful
beaches.
Every
year
water
sports,
especially
surfing
and
water
skiing
attract
many
tourists
to
the
island.
Hawaii
has
been
a
magical
name
to
people
who
like
to
travel
for
many
years.
People
on
both
sides
of
the
Pacific
Ocean
(太平洋)
in
Japan
and
in
America,
dream
of
seeing
these
beautiful
islands
in
the
middle
of
the
ocean.
In
the
tropical
(热带的)
lands,
the
sun
drops
like
a
ball
of
golden
fire
into
the
sea,
and
it
drops
so
quickly
that
you
can
almost
see
it
move.
The
sun
leaves
behind
a
glow
(落日余晖)
that
lights
the
sky
in
the
quiet
water.
People
often
have
a
quiet,
enjoyable
time
walking
along
the
water.
This
scenery
here
is
not
very
different
from
the
exciting
beauty
that
greeted
the
first
tourists
to
these
islands
centuries
ago.
They
came
in
canoes
not
much
bigger
than
small
boats.
They
found
the
beautiful
white
sand
beaches
and
the
waving
palm
trees
(棕榈树),
but
there
were
no
grand
hotels
like
the
ones
we
see
today.
The
first
people
came
to
Hawaii
nearly
two
thousand
years
ago,
but
skyscraper
(摩天大楼)
hotels
were
only
built
in
the
last
25
years.
Now
planes
make
it
possible
to
fly
to
Hawaii
for
a
weekend
from
Tokyo
or
San
Francesco.
No
matter
where
people
come
from,
they
really
want
to
see
the
earliest
beauty
of
Hawaii.
They
want
to
see
the
lovely
beaches
and
the
mountains
which
are
almost
hidden
by
the
tall
hotels.
(
)
6.
What’s
Hawaii
famous
for
A.
The
beautiful
beaches.
B.
The
tourists
to
the
island.
C.
The
waving
palm
trees.
(
)
7.
What
does
the
sun
drop
like
in
the
tropical
lands
A.
The
sea.
B.
A
ball
of
golden
fire.
C.
A
glow.
(
)
8.
When
did
the
first
people
come
to
Hawaii
A.
In
1987.
B.
About
twenty-five
years
ago.
C.
About
two
thousand
years
ago.
(
)
9.
The
beauty
of
the
islands
_____
for
centuries.
A.
has
changed
B.
has
greeted
the
first
tourists
C.
has
remained
nearly
unchanged
(
)
10.
Which
is
TRUE
according
to
the
passage
A.
People
really
want
to
see
the
earliest
beauty
of
Hawaii.
B.
People
often
have
a
quiet,
unhappy
time
walking
along
the
water.
C.
People
only
in
Japan
dream
of
seeing
the
beautiful
islands.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
When
July
comes,
children
know
they’ll
have
their
examinations
and
the
school
year
will
1
soon.
Boys
and
girls
will
have
nearly
a
two-month
holiday,
and
they’ll
leave
school
2
train
or
by
car
to
3
their
parents.
The
summer
holidays
are
the
4
time
of
the
year
for
most
children.
The
weather
is
usually
good,
so
children
can
spend
most
of
their
time
5
outside.
If
one
lives
in
the
countryside,
he
can
go
and
play
in
the
woods
or
in
the
fields.
If
he
6
in
a
big
town,
he
can
usually
go
to
the
park
to
play.
The
best
place
for
children
to
spend
their
summer
holidays
is
the
7
.
Some
children
are
lucky
enough
to
live
near
the
sea.
8
for
those
who
do
not
live
there,
if
they
have
the
luck
to
stay
in
one
of
the
big
seaside
towns
for
a
week
or
two,
they’ll
9
it
all
the
following
school
year.
Now,
10
makes
children
like
the
seaside
so
much
I
think
they
are
the
sand,
the
sea
and
the
sun.
The
feelings
of
the
sand
under
their
feet,
salt
water
on
their
skin,
and
the
warm
sun
on
their
backs
make
them
very
happy.
(
)
1.
A.
arrive
B.
start
C.
end
(
)
2.
A.
on
B.
by
C.
in
(
)
3.
A.
love
B.
see
C.
watch
(
)
4.
A.
best
B.
better
C.
worst
(
)
5.
A.
missing
B.
working
C.
playing
(
)
6.
A.
works
B.
walks
C.
lives
(
)
7.
A.
village
B.
seaside
C.
city
(
)
8.
A.
But
B.
Unless
C.
Or
(
)
9.
A.
hear
from
B.
speak
to
C.
talk
about
(
)
10.
A
.
that
B.
which
C.
what
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Article
1
A
small
town
named
Bundanoon
in
Australia
has
decided
to
stop
the
sale
of
bottled
water.
The
government
says
that
bottled
water
can
cause
environment
problems.
After
people
drink
the
water,
they
throw
the
bottles
everywhere.
The
government
also
encourages
visitors
to
get
water
from
water
stations
in
the
main
streets,
and
fill
the
water
in
bottles
that
can
be
used
again.
All
the
shopkeepers
in
the
town
support
the
decision.
Bundanoon
is
the
world’s
first
town
that
has
got
its
shops
to
stop
selling
bottled
water.
Probably
we
should
follow
the
example.
Let’s
stop
buy
bottled
water
and
use
running
water!
Article
2
People
are
busy
these
says
and
they
have
no
time
to
cook.
This
becomes
a
problem,
because
most
families
love
home
cooking!
The
food
tastes
good
and
warm,
and
a
family
meal
brings
everyone
together.
In
some
families
meals
are
often
the
only
times
everyone
sees
one
another
at
the
same
time.
Another
reason
people
enjoy
home
cooking
is
that
it
is
often
a
way
of
showing
love.
A
parent
who
makes
some
cookies
is
not
just
satisfying
(满意)
a
child’s
sweet
tooth.
She
or
he
is
sending
a
message.
The
message
says.
“I
care
about
you
enough
to
spend
an
hour
making
cookies
that
you
will
eat
up
in
fifteen
minutes
if
I
let
you.”
(
)
1.
The
sale
of
bottled
water
is
stopped
in
Bundanoon.
(
)
2.
The
government
also
encourages
visitors
to
drink
bottled
water.
(
)
3.
People
are
so
busy
these
days
with
home
cooking.
(
)
4.
In
some
families,
meals
are
often
the
only
times
everyone
sees
one
another
at
the
same
time.
(
)
5.
A
parent
who
makes
some
cookies
is
just
satisfying
a
child’s
sweet
tooth.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
Meimei:
Hi,
Tom!
Come
in,
please.
Tom:
Hi!
1
are
you
doing
Meimei:
I’m
looking
for
2
about
Sydney
on
the
Internet.
I’m
going
to
3
for
my
holiday.
Tom:
Aren’t
you
lucky？Have
you
4
been
there
Meimei:
No,
5
my
father
has
been
there
twice.
He
told
me
there
were
many
places
of
6
there.
Tom:
7
are
you
leaving
Meimei:
I’m
leaving
at
9
a.
m.
8
Tuesday,
July
4th.
Tom:
Are
you
going
by
9

Meimei:
Of
course.
Tom:
Have
you
ever
flown
in
a
plane
Meimei:
No,
10
.
Tom:
You
must
be
excited
when
you
fly
in
a
plane.
Meimei:
Really
I
can’t
wait
for
it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
kid
use
look
chance
when
style
western
how
your
restaurant
difference
make
Special
Asian
country:
East
meets
West
Singapore
is
a
special
Asian
country.
Eastern
culture
meets
and
mixes
with
1
culture
there.
Singapore
people
share
many
things
with
us,
such
as
the
life
2
.
But
they
are
also
very
3
from
us.
English
is
Singapore’s
official
(官方的)
language.
People
there
start
to
learn
English
when
they
are
4
.
So,
your
Singapore
study
trip
will
be
very
interesting.
You
are
going
to
take
a
good
5
at
Singapore.
For
example,
you
will
see
the
highest
man-made
waterfall
and
many
rare
birds
at
Jurong
Birdpark
(裕廊飞禽公园).
And,
you
will
visit
some
schools
and
know
6
kids
there
have
classes.
You
will
learn
7
everyday
English,
like
names
of
food
and
table
manners.
Remember
to
take
notes
because
you
will
have
meals
in
real
8
.
You
will
have
to
practise
your
English.
It’s
great,
isn’t
it
The
Singapore
trip
has
a
very
special
part.
That
is
leadership
training.
You
often
act
as
a
leader
(sometimes
you
don’t
notice
it
9
.
Then,
how
to
be
a
good
leader
Or,
you
can
stand
out
and
be
the
leader,
but
you
don’t
catch
the
10
.
Then,
how
to
change
this
You
may
find
your
answers
and
be
a
successful
leader
after
the
training.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
“USA
Britain
Which
country
is
better
to
study
in ”
We
often
hear
such
discussions.
As
China
opens
its
door,
it
is
a
dream
for
many
Chinese
students
to
study
abroad.
They
want
to
learn
about
the
outside
world.
It’s
true
that
studying
abroad
can
help
students
develop
themselves.
Their
foreign
language
skills
will
be
improved
and
it
may
be
easier
to
find
jobs.
But
there
are
problems
that
should
be
considered.
Language
is
the
first.
Students
must
spend
a
lot
of
time
learning
another
language.
Students
must
also
learn
to
live
without
parents’
care
and
deal
with
all
kinds
of
things
they
haven’t
had
to
do
before,
like
looking
after
themselves.
There
are
reports
about
Chinese
students
abroad
running
into
an
ocean
of
difficulties
and
giving
up
finally.
When
they
have
to
take
care
of
themselves,
it
is
hard
for
students
to
study
well.
Finally,
studying
abroad
brings
a
heavy
burden
(负担)
to
the
family.
For
most
Chinese
parents,
the
cost
of
studying
abroad
is
very
high.
But
is
it
worth
it
We
know
that
there
are
many
famous
people
who
have
achieved
success
through
their
hard
work
in
China.
Liu
Xiang
is
a
good
example.
Once
an
American
teacher
invited
him
there,
but
he
refused.
He
kept
training
hard
with
his
Chinese
teacher.
He
surprised
the
world
when
he
won
a
gold
medal
at
the
Athens
Olympic
Games.
So
when
you
wonder
which
country
is
better
to
study
in,
think
again.
Title:
Studying
at
1
or
abroad
Phenomenon（现象）
Studying
abroad
has
become
a
2
for
Chinese
students.
Advantages
◆
It
is
helpful
to
the
future
3
of
Chinese
students.
◆
It
helps
to
4
foreign
language
skills.
◆
It
enables
Chinese
students
to
find
jobs
more
5
.
6
◆
It
7
Chinese
students
too
much
time
to
learn
a
foreign
language.
◆
It’s
hard
for
Chinese
students
to
get
used
to
the
life
abroad
8
parents’
care.
◆
Parents
may
be
under
pressure
because
the
cost
of
studying
abroad
is
very
9
.
Purpose:
To
tell
us
studying
abroad
is
not
the
only
way
to
be
10
by
describing
Liu
Xiang’s
example.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
I
went
to
Disney
World
when
I
was
five
years
old.
My
father,
my
mother,
my
aunt,
my
older
sister,
my
two
older
brothers,
and
I
all
traveled
to
Florida
to
visit
Disney
World.
1
I
had
never
been
on
an
airplane
before.
I
was
so
excited
to
fly
in
an
airplane
for
the
first
time.
We
left
cold,
snowy
New
York
and
arrived
in
warm,
sunny
Florida
to
spend
our
family
vacation.
I
couldn’t
wait
to
see
Mickey,
Minnie,
Donald,
Daisy,
Goofy,
and
Pluto!
We
stayed
at
the
Disney
World
Hotel.
My
family
and
I
ate
breakfast
with
all
of
the
DisneyWorld
roles.
It
was
so
much
fun!
2
Then
we
went
to
the
amusement
park.
We
were
welcomed
into
Disney
World
by
Mickey
Mouse
himself.
3
My
family
and
I
then
went
on
all
of
the
exciting
rides.
My
mother
and
I
rode
on
the
teacups.
We
had
to
spin
(旋转)
the
wheel
to
make
the
teacup
go!
The
more
we
turned
the
wheel,
the
faster
the
teacup
spun.
I
rode
the
teacups
many
times.
The
next
ride
we
went
on
was
the
Water
Safari
(旅行).
We
all
sat
in
a
raft
(筏).
As
the
raft
drifted
down
the
river
we
saw
strange
animals
and
were
sprayed
(喷洒)
with
water
by
a
giant,
not
real
elephant!
After
the
Safari
all
of
us
walked
over
to...Space
Mountain!
My
father,
my
brothers,
and
my
sister
all
rode
on
Space
Mountain.
But
I
was
too
afraid.
4
I
loved
Disney
World.
5
Our
vacation
was
fun,
exciting,
and
full
of
adventure.
There
is
something
for
everyone,
kids
and
grown-ups,
in
the
magical
world
of
Disney.
I
spent
a
great
time
with
my
father,
mother,
aunt,
brothers
and
sister.
I
will
always
cherish
(珍惜)
the
memories
of
my
family
vacation
to
Disney
World.
A.
I
had
my
photograph
taken
with
Mickey.B.
My
family
and
I
flew
in
a
plane
to
Disney
World.C.
I
wanted
to
stay
in
Disney
World
forever!D.
We
were
too
excited
to
fly
in
an
airplane
for
the
first
time.E.
As
I
was
eating
breakfast
Pluto
bit
me
on
the
head!F.
I
rode
the
Goldrush
Mountain
roller
coaster
(过山车)
with
my
father,
instead.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Traffic
rules
help
to
keep
order
on
the
road.
They
also
help
to
keep
people
1
.
The
pedestrian
(行人)
has
as
many
rules
to
2
as
the
driver
of
a
car.
You
should
wall
on
the
sidewalk
(人行道)
or
at
the
side
of
the
road.
Always
look
3
before
you
wall
across
the
street.
If
you
like
riding
a
bike,
don’t
ride
in
the
middle
of
the
road
or
run
4
red
traffic
lights.
When
you
ride
a
bike
with
a
friend,
don’t
look
around
or
talk.
If
you
drive
a
car,
you
should
5
at
the
traffic
lights.
You
must
always
6
a
seat
belt
(安全带).
Without
belts
7
the
driver
and
the
passengers
may
be
badly
hurt
in
a
sudden
accident.
You
may
not
need
to
take
a
bus,
but
8
if
you
have
to
travel
in
one.
Get
on
or
get
off
a
bus
only
when
it
comes
to
a
9
.
When
it
is
full,
don’t
try
to
get
inside
10
you
may
fall
off.
Traffic
rules
are
also
called
Road
Safety
rules.
(
)
1.
A.
healthy
B.
safe
C.
happy
(
)
2.
A.
follow
B.
make
C.
break
(
)
3.
A.
happy
B.
happily
C.
carefully
(
)
4.
A.
through
B.
across
C.
along
(
)
5.
A.
speed
up
B.
go
ahead
C.
slow
down
(
)
6.
A.
take
B.
wear
C.
carry
(
)
7.
A.
half
B.
none
C.
both
(
)
8.
A.
look
around
B.
take
care
C.
take
a
seat
(
)
9.
A.
sign
B.
stop
C.
corner
(
)
10.
A.
and
B.
so
C.
or
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Young
people
and
older
people
do
not
always
agree.
They
sometimes
have
different
ideas
about
living,
working
and
playing.
But
in
one
special
program
in
New
York
State,
adults
and
teenagers
live
together
in
a
friendly
way.
Each
summer
200
teenagers
and
50
adults
live
together
for
eight
weeks
as
members
of
a
special
work
group.
Everyone
works
several
hours
each
day.
They
do
so
not
just
to
keep
busy
but
to
find
meaning
and
fun
in
work.
Some
teenagers
work
in
the
forests
or
on
the
farms
near
the
village.
Some
learn
to
make
things
like
tables
and
chairs
and
to
build
houses.
The
adults
teach
them
these
skills.
There
are
several
free
hours
each
day.
Weekends
are
free,
too.
During
the
free
hours
some
of
the
teenagers
learn
photo-taking
or
drawing.
Others
sit
around
and
talk
or
sing.
Each
teenager
chooses
his
own
way
to
pass
his
free
time.
When
people
live
together,
they
should
have
rules.
In
this
program
the
teenagers
and
the
adults
make
the
rules
together.
If
someone
breaks
a
rule,
the
problem
goes
before
the
whole
group.
They
talk
about
it
and
ask,
“Why
did
it
happen
What
should
we
do
about
it ”
One
of
the
teenagers
has
said
something
about
it,
“You
have
to
stop
thinking
only
about
yourself.
You
learn
how
to
think
about
the
group.”
(
)
1.
In
one
special
program
in
New
York
State,
young
and
older
people
______.
A.
don’t
work
well
together
B.
are
friendly
to
each
other
C.
teach
each
other
new
ways
of
building
houses
(
)
2.
All
the
members
work
some
time
every
day
mainly
to
______.
A.
find
useful
things
and
pleasure
in
work
B.
learn
new
skills
of
farming
C.
get
used
to
the
life
on
the
farms
(
)
3.
Living
together,
______.
A.
the
members
should
not
break
the
rules
they
make
together
B.
the
members
have
to
obey
the
rules
the
adults
make
C.
the
members
have
no
free
time
but
on
weekends
(
)
4.
The
last
passage
shows
that
the
teenager
thinks
his
experience
in
the
program
is
______.
A.
unpleasant
B.
tiring
C.
helping
(
)
5.
Which
of
the
following
is
true
A.
The
young
and
the
old
always
have
the
same
ideas
about
living.
B.
When
people
live
together,
they
shouldn’t
notice
others.
C.
People
should
think
about
the
group
when
they
live
together.
B
Do
you
want
to
be
the
most
popular
person
in
the
class
You
don’t
need
to
change
your
character;
you
just
need
to
improve
your
personality
(人格).
In
fact,
the
most
popular
people
are
trusted
(信任)
and
loved
because
they
stay
normal
but
still
have
something
that
makes
them
different
from
the
rest
of
us.
Here
are
some
pieces
of
advice
about
becoming
the
most
popular
person
in
the
class.
●If
you
want
others
to
like
and
respect
you,
you
have
to
start
by
liking
and
accepting
yourself.
Do
not
change
yourself
in
order
to
please
other.
●Be
helpful
to
everyone
and
do
it
happily.
Being
nice
to
people
is
almost
like
helping
them,
because
by
being
nice
you
make
others
happy.
●Be
active
and
have
a
positive
view
towards
life.
Develop
confidence
in
yourself.
●Stay
clean
and
wear
fresh
clothes.
Do
not
try
to
follow
fashion
to
please
others.
●Respect
cannot
be
bought
with
big
words
and
power.
You
have
to
get
it
by
being
honest.
It
also
helps
your
personal
growth.
You
must
be
a
person
that
can
be
trusted
to
get
respect.
(
)
6.
What
can
we
know
from
the
first
paragraph
A.
We
should
improve
our
personality
to
be
trusted
and
loved.
B.
We
should
change
our
character.
C.
We
shouldn’t
improve
our
personality.
(
)
7.
How
can
you
be
respected
by
your
classmates
according
to
the
article
A.
By
following
fashion.
B.
By
using
big
words.
C.
By
being
honest
and
helpful.
(
)
8.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“respect”
mean
in
Passage
A.
注意.
B.
考虑.
C.
尊重.
(
)
9.
The
underlined
sentence
shows
that
______.
A.
you
should
always
be
nice
to
others
B.
you
should
make
yourself
happy
C.
we
can
help
others
only
by
being
happy
(
)
10.
What’s
the
best
title
for
the
article
A.
How
to
Please
Others
B.
How
to
Be
the
Favorite
C.
How
to
Develop
Power
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
We
often
face
difficult
times.
It’s
a
part
of
1
.
And
in
these
difficult
times,
just
stopping
is
not
enough,
and
we
need
to
ask
for
help.
When
I
have
a
problem,
I
never
go
to
a
single
person
for
help.
2
,
I
am
lucky
enough
to
have
a
strong
support
group.
First,
I
have
a
very
strong
relationship
(关系)
with
my
3
.
They
know
that
I
value
(重视)
their
wisdom.
So
when
I’m
faced
with
difficulty,
my
parents
are
usually
the
4
ones
I
go
to.
As
teenagers,
many
of
us
don’t
think
our
parents
can
5
us.
However,
they
have
gone
through
situations
as
6
as
or
maybe
even
harder
than
those
we
go
through
today.
So
why
not
7
them
and
learn
from
their
experiences
There
are
quite
a
few
situations
when
we
don’t
want
to
ask
our
parents
for
advice.
For
these,
we
can
turn
to
our
8
.
It’s
great
to
be
able
to
receive
the
opinion
of
a
peer.
Having
problems
is
9
to
be
ashamed
(羞愧)
of.
When
you
need
to,
go
ask
for
help,
because
the
10
of
another
can
often
get
you
through
your
darkest
times!
(
)
1.
A.
school
(
)
2.
A.
In
fact
(
)
3.
A.
teachers
(
)
4.
A.
last
(
)
5.
A.
understand
(
)
6.
A.
easy
(
)
7.
A.
look
for
(
)
8.
A.
grandparents
(
)
9.
A.
nothing
(
)
10.A.
problem
B.
life
B.
For
example
B.
classmates
B.
second
B.
know
B.
hard
B.
ask
for
B.
teachers
B.
something
B.
help
C.
workC.
Even
ifC.
parentsC.
firstC.
loveC.
difficultC.
listen
toC.
friendsC.
anythingC.
relationship
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
A
teenage
girl
couldn’t
stand
her
parents’
family
rules,
so
she
left
home.
She
wanted
to
be
famous.
But
she
had
poor
education
and
several
years
later
she
had
to
ask
for
food
on
the
street
for
a
living.
Now
her
father
has
died.
Her
mother
is
an
old
woman.
But
she
is
still
looking
for
her
daughter.
She
has
been
to
every
corner
of
the
city.
Everywhere
she
goes,
she
puts
up
a
big
photo
of
herself
on
the
wall.
At
the
lower
part
of
the
photo
she
writes,
“I
still
love
you
.
.
.
,
come
back
home!”
One
day,
the
daughter
saw
one
of
the
photos.
The
face
was
familiar
(熟悉的).
“Is
that
my
mother ”
She
moved
closer
and
read
the
words
“I
still
love
you
...”
She
cried.
When
she
got
home,
it
was
early
morning.
She
knocked
on
the
door.
The
door
opened
itself.
She
rushed
to
her
mother’s
bedroom.
Her
mother
was
sleeping.
She
woke
her
mother
up,
“It’s
me!
Your
daughter
is
back
home!”
The
mother
and
daughter
held
each
other,
full
of
happy
tears.
The
daughter
asked,
“Why
is
the
door
not
locked
A
thief
could
get
in.”
The
mother
answered
softly,
“The
door
has
never
been
locked
since
you
left.”
The
door
of
parents’
love
for
their
children
will
never
be
closed.
(
)
1.
The
girl
left
home
because
her
parents
were
cruel
to
her.
(
)
2.
No
money
caused
the
girl
not
to
be
famous.
(
)
3.
The
mother
put
up
her
daughter’s
photo
on
the
wall
so
that
she
could
find
her
daughter.
(
)
4.
When
the
girl
came
back
home,
she
couldn’t
wait
to
see
her
mother.
(
)
5.
From
the
story
we
know
that
parents
love
their
children
forever
at
any
time.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
(Lava
went
to
see
a
new
movie
in
the
morning.
But
she
didn’t
enjoy
it.
She’s
talking
to
Jenny
about
what
happened.)
Jenny:
You
look
unhappy.
What’s
wrong
1
you
Lava:
I
watched
a
movie
in
the
morning.
Jenny:
So
the
movie
was
2
,
wasn’t
it
Lava:
No.
The
movie
was
great.
It
was
the
audience
(观众).
Some
people
were
late
for
the
movie,
some
took
phone
calls
3
the
movie,
some
made
noise
while
eating
snacks
and
some
talked
4
.
I
was
annoyed
all
the
time.
Jenny:
That’s
too
bad.
People
should
obey
certain
5
while
watching
a
movie.
Lava:
Yes.
The
first
thing
is
to
keep
the
theater
6
.
We
should
sit
down
before
the
movie
begins.
We
should
7
off
our
mobile
phones.
We
should
eat
snacks
quietly.
And
we
should
talk
as
little
as
8
.
Jenny:
Yes,
you
are
right.
And
we
should
take
away
our
9
when
we
leave.
Lava:
I
hope
10
should
do
these
things
so
that
we
can
enjoy
the
movie
better.
Jenny:
Me
too.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
one
take
you
keep
music
think
be
not
comfortable
if
happen
chore
story
A
Little
Lonely
It’s
a
good
idea
to
talk
with
your
mom
or
dad
about
how
you
feel
about
being
home
alone,
especially
1
you
feel
scared
when
you’re
home
alone.
They
might
be
able
to
give
you
some
ideas
that
will
make
you
feel
2
.
Maybe
you
can
go
home
with
a
friend
3
a
week
or
a
neighbor
can
start
checking
on
you.
Sometimes
a
kid
just
4
ready
to
stay
home
alone.
Keeping
busy
with
homework,
5
,
and
play
can
make
your
“home
alone”
time
go
quickly.
But
you
might
find
6
wondering
what
to
do
next.
The
trick
is
7
about
your
choices
ahead
of
time.
You
might
even
want
to
8
a
list
of
things
you
like
to
do.
Need
some
ideas
to
get
you
started
＊Read
a
book
or
magazine.
＊Work
on
a
hobby
or
try
a
new
one.
＊Listen
to
9
,
sing,
or
play
an
instrument.
＊Write
a
letter
or
an
email
or
phone
a
friend.
Write
a
story
full
of
made-up
adventures
(冒险)
of
what
10
to
you
when
you
were
home
alone
—
and
don’t
forget
to
give
it
a
happy
ending!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Almost
all
of
us
have
unpleasant
habits.
We
all
want
to
get
rid
of
(摆脱)
them,
but
we
don’t
know
proper
ways.
Here’s
some
advice.
●Write
down
all
the
reasons
why
you
want
to
stop
some
behavior.
Look
at
the
reasons
very
often.
●It’s
clever
to
do
something
else
when
you
want
to
stop
your
bad
habits.
If
you
get
angry
easily,
for
example,
you
can
go
out
for
a
walk.
●Decide
what
you’ll
do
to
reward
(奖励)
yourself
if
you
really
get
rid
of
your
bad
habits.
●If
you
get
too
heavy,
keep
junk
food
out
of
your
house.
●Bad
habits
develop
over
years,
so
you
can’t
get
rid
of
them
very
soon.
So
you
should
be
patient.
●Don’t
be
afraid
to
ask
others
for
support.
You
can
talk
to
your
friends,
family
or
other
people.
When
you
talk
to
them,
they
might
be
able
to
provide
some
advice
that
you
can’t
get
from
yourself.
How
to
Get
Rid
of
Bad
Habits
Make
a
list
Write
down
1
you
want
to
get
rid
of
your
bad
habits.
Join
in
some
activities
You’d
better
do
something
else
when
you
want
to
stop
your
bad
habits.
Give
yourself
a
reward
Decide
how
to
reward
yourself
if
you
2
in
getting
rid
of
your
bad
habits.
Keep
off
your
bad
habits
Stay
away
from
3
if
you
want
to
be
thinner.
Be
patient
It’s
4
to
get
rid
of
a
bad
habit
in
a
short
time.
Ask
for
help
When
you
talk
to
others,
they
may
give
you
5
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
Hi,
Louis!
A.
For
example,
in
Japan,
New
Year
is
for
spending
time
with
the
family
to
eat,
talk,
have
fun,
and
go
to
the
temples.
B.
I’m
writing
to
tell
you
something
about
the
customs
and
festivals.
C.
On
some
of
them
you
go
out
with
friends;
on
others
you
stay
home
to
eat,
talk,
and
have
fun
with
your
family.
D.
This
is
much
more
interesting
than
learning
them
at
the
library
from
morning
to
evening.
E.
I
have
been
interested
in
foreign
customs
since
I
was
little.
F.
For
example
in
the
U.S.,
everyone
thinks
New
Year’s
Eve
and
New
Year
are
both
for
partying
with
friends.
G.
Everyone
loves
holidays
since
one
doesn’t
need
to
go
to
school
or
work.
H.
If
you
learn
these
different
holiday
customs,
you
will
learn
about
different
histories
and
cultures.
I.
The
opposite
is
true
in
Japan
though.
J.
Although
all
holidays
mean
no
school
and
work,
but
not
all
of
them
are
the
same.
Love,
Sue
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：
八、1~10
BGJCF
IAEHD阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
The
picture
shows
eighteen-year-old
Katy
Ross
in
Nepal,
a
small
country
north
of
India.
Katy
1
school
eight
months
ago
and
soon
she
will
go
to
university.
She
loves
traveling
and
decides
to
visit
Asia
2
she
goes
to
university.
Katy
is
living
with
a
family
in
the
capital
of
Nepal.
She
has
3
a
lot
about
the
country
since
she
arrived
four
months
ago.
The
family
has
two
children
but
many
uncles
and
cousins
live
with
4
in
their
big
house.
They
have
taken
Katy
to
many
parties.
Katy
teaches
for
four
hours
a
day
at
a
small
5
.
All
the
classes
are
in
English,
and
the
pupils
have
spoken
English
since
the
6
of
six.
The
older
children
speak
English
very
7
.
Katy
has
taught
writing,
grammar,
and
art,
all
in
English.
She
enjoys
art
the
most,
and
she
thinks
the
children
like
these
lessons
best,
too!
Katy
has
not
had
a
lot
of
time
to
8
Nepal,
but
soon,
she
will
stop
teaching
and
travel
around
Nepal
9
a
friend.
“After
that,”
Katy
says,
“we’ll
visit
more
countries
in
Asia.
We’re
not
10
which
ones
yet.”
(
)
1.
A.
left
B.
found
C.
visited
(
)
2.
A.
before
B.
when
C.
after
(
)
3.
A.
used
B.
learnt
C.
made
(
)
4.
A.
us
B.
him
C.
them
(
)
5.
A.
shop
B.
cinema
C.
school
(
)
6.
A.
life
B.
age
C.
number
(
)
7.
A.
bad
B.
good
C.
well
(
)
8.
A.
see
B.
hear
C.
look
(
)
9.
A.
of
B.
on
C.
with
(
)
10.
A.
tired
B.
sure
C.
afraid
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Getting
in
the
habit
of
giving
and
receiving
help
builds
good
relationships.
It
makes
us
feel
more
care.
It
stops
stress
from
building
because
we
know
someone
else
is
thinking
about
us.
And
if
there
is
a
problem,
we’re
sharing
it
before
it
gets
too
big.
It
just
feels
great
to
help.
Try
these
small
practices
at
home
and
see
how
they
make
you
feel:
＊Help
your
little
brother
or
sister
with
a
homework
problem.
＊Help
your
dad
prepare
dinner.
＊Help
your
mom
carry
living
goods.
＊Offer
to
do
a
chore
that’s
not
usually
yours
“just
because”
.
There’s
more
to
it
than
just
feeling
good:
Kindness
is
contagious.
It
can
create
more
kindness.
So
you
might
start
to
notice
your
family
(or
friends)
reaching
out
to
help
more.
Just
don’t
fall
into
the
trap
(陷阱)
of
expectation.
If
we
help
out
only
because
we
expect
the
other
person
to
do
something
in
return,
we
will
probably
end
up
feeling
disappointed
and
angry
instead
of
happy
and
fulfilled.
So
decide
to
help
simply
because
of
the
positive
feelings
it
creates.
Then,
when
someone
else
does
something
nice
for
you,
it’s
a
wonderful
surprise.
Giving
and
receiving
is
one
of
the
most
basic
friendship
skills.
With
a
good
network
of
supportive
people,
we
are
less
stressed.
We
feel
loved
and
understood,
so
we’re
better
able
to
solve
problems,
bounce
back
from
disappointments,
and
try
again.
(
)
1.
How
do
you
feel
if
you
are
getting
in
the
habit
of
giving
and
receiving
help
A.
Think
of
more
care.
B.
Feel
stress
from
building.
C.
Feel
more
care.
(
)
2.
How
to
build
nice
relationships
according
to
the
passage
A.
Help
your
dad
prepare
dinner.
B.
Get
in
the
habit
of
giving
and
receiving
help.
C.
Stops
stress
from
building.
(
)
3.
Which
of
the
following
is
not
true
A.
We
help
out
only
because
we
expect
the
other
person
in
return.
B.
It’s
one
of
the
most
basic
friendship
skills
to
give
and
receive.
C.
It
just
makes
us
feel
great
to
help
others.
(
)
4.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“contagious”
mean
in
the
passage
A.
感染.
B.
疏导.
C.蔓延.
(
)
5.
Which
of
the
following
is
the
best
title
of
this
passage
A.
Making
Help
a
Habit
B.
Help
Mom
Carry
Goods
C.
Help
Others
With
Homework
B
Pass
It
Along!
Last
July,
my
12-year-old
car
died
on
Californian’s
Santa
Freeway.
It
was
an
hour
before
sunset,
and
I
was
25
miles
from
home.
I
couldn’t
reach
anyone
to
pick
me
up,
so
I
decided
to
take
a
bus.
Not
knowing
the
routes,
I
thought
I’d
just
go
east.
A
bus
stopped.
I
got
on
and
asked
the
driver
how
far
she
was
going.
“Ten
more
miles,”
she
said.
There
was
another
bus
I
could
take
from
there.
This
clearly
was
going
to
be
a
long
night.
I
get
off
at
the
end
of
the
route
and
she
told
me
which
bus
to
look
for.
After
waiting
for
30
minutes,
I
began
to
think
about
a
very
expensive
taxi
ride
home.
Then
a
bus
came
up.
There
was
no
lighted
number
above
its
windshield.
It
was
out
of
service,
but
the
door
opened.
It
was
the
same
driver.
“I
just
can’t
leave
you
here,”
she
said.
“This
isn’t
the
nicest
place.
I
will
give
you
a
ride
home.”
“You
will
drive
me
home
on
the
bus ”
I
asked,
astonished.
“No,
I
will
take
you
in
my
car,”
she
said.
“It’s
a
long
way,”
I
insisted.
“Come
on,”
she
said,
“I
have
nothing
else
to
do.”
As
we
drove
from
the
station
in
the
car,
she
began
telling
me
a
story.
A
few
days
earlier,
her
brother
had
run
out
of
gas.
A
good
man
picked
him
up,
took
him
to
a
service
station
and
then
back
to
his
car.
“I’m
just
passing
the
favor
(慈善的行为)
along,”
she
said.
When
I
offered
her
money
as
a
thank-you,
she
wouldn’t
accept.
“Just
do
something
nice
for
somebody.
Pass
it
along.”
she
said.
(
)
6.
There
was
something
wrong
with
the
writer’s
car
______.
A.
late
at
night
B.
early
in
the
morning
C.
an
hour
before
sunset
(
)
7.
The
writer
changed
his
mind
after
waiting
for
30
minutes
because
______.
A.
he
became
impatient
and
a
bit
worried
B.
a
taxi
ride
would
be
more
comfortable
C.
he
knew
the
driver
would
never
return
(
)
8.
The
bus
driver
drove
the
writer
home
later
because
______.
A.
her
brother
had
told
her
to
do
so
B.
she
wanted
to
earn
more
money
C.
she
wanted
to
do
something
good
for
others
(
)
9.
The
underlined
word
“astonished”
in
the
passage
probably
means
______.
A.
surprised
B.
grateful
C.
happy
(
)
10.
The
bus
driver
hoped
that
the
writer
______.
A.
would
drive
someone
home
B.
would
help
someone
in
need
C.
would
keep
her
in
memory
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Bill,
a
thirteen-year-old
boy,
thought
he
had
grown
up
to
be
a
man.
But
his
parents
told
him,
“You
won’t
be
a
real
man
until
you
begin
to
1
helping
others.”
One
morning,
his
parents
gave
him
some
money
to
2
some
milk
for
them.
Outside
a
shop
he
saw
a
homeless
old
man
who
looked
very
3
.
Bill
went
to
him
and
asked,
“What’s
wrong
with
you ”
The
old
man
answered,
“I’m
hungry.
I
haven’t
had
any
food
for
two
days.”
At
the
thought
of
his
parents’
words,
Bill
said
to
the
old
man,
“Let’s
go
to
the
4
.”
When
they
got
there,
Bill
asked
the
waiter
to
bring
out
bread
and
coffee
to
the
old
man.
The
old
man
finished
the
meal
quickly.
After
the
waiter
5
the
plate
and
the
cup,
the
old
man
said,
“Sorry
for
giving
you
so
much
6
.
I’m
fine
now.
I’ll
7
forget
your
kindness!
You
are
a
very
good
young
man.”
Bill
was
8
when
he
heard
this.
Just
when
he
wanted
to
pay
for
the
meal,
the
waiter
came.
Bill
and
the
old
man
learned
9
that
the
food
was
free
10
it
was
the
birthday
of
the
boss,
and
they
were
the
first
customers
(顾客)
that
day.
(
)
1.
A.
think
about
B.
depend
on
C.
give
up
(
)
2.
A.
lend
B.
buy
C.
drink
(
)
3.
A.
afraid
B.
glad
C.
sick
(
)
4.
A.
restaurant
B.
library
C.
hospital
(
)
5.
A.
sent
out
B.
got
down
C.
gave
back
(
)
6.
A.
excuse
B.
advice
C.
trouble
(
)
7.
A.
never
B.
always
C.
usually
(
)
8.
A.
nervous
B.
pleased
C.
sorry
(
)
9.
A.
in
surprise
B.
as
usual
C.
once
again
(
)
10.
A.
when
B.
until
C.
because
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Every
day,
a
common
person
in
the
U.S.
throws
away
more
than
three
and
a
half
pounds
of
rubbish.
Every
month,
we
throw
out
our
own
weight
in
packaging
alone.
Packaging
(including
boxes,
bags
etc)
comes
to
our
homes
with
the
things
we
have
bought.
Where
does
all
that
rubbish
go
We
bury
most
of
it
in
a
landfill,
but
the
landfills
in
many
cities
in
the
U.S.
are
almost
filled.
Many
of
the
old
landfills
have
poisons
that
can
make
the
water
and
soil
around
them
dangerous
to
your
health.
What
can
you
do
to
help
Follow
the
three
R’s:
REUSE,
REFUSE.
AND
RECYCLE.
Reuse
You
don’t
need
new
bags
every
time
you
go
to
the
store.
Reuse
the
old
ones—and
you
had
better
use
paper,
not
plastic.
Refuse
Stop
buying
anything
that
is
over-packaged.
Also
look
for
products
that
come
in
boxes
made
of
recycled
cardboard.
Recycle
People
can
use
cans,
newspapers
and
plastic
bottles
again.
So
don’t
throw
them
away.
Send
them
to
the
recycling
center.
(
)
1.
Americans
recycle
most
of
their
rubbish.
(
)
2.
We
should
not
buy
any
products
with
too
much
packaging.
(
)
3.
“Reuse”
in
the
passage
means
“use
old
bags
again”.
(
)
4.
“Refuse”
here
means
“don’t
buy
products
that
comes
in
boxes
made
of
new
cardboard”.
(
)
5.
“Recycle”
here
means
“collect
cans,
newspapers
and
plastic
bottles
and
use
them
again”.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
Boy:
I’m
ready
to
do
some
volunteer
work
for
our
city.
I’d
like
to
work
1
.
Woman:
You
could
help
pick
2
trash
beside
the
streets.
Boy:
I
could
do
3
!
But
what
could
my
sister
do
She
wants
to
volunteer,
but
she
doesn’t
like
to
work
outside.
Woman:
What
does
she
like
to
do
Boy:
She
likes
to
play
4
children.
Woman:
She
could
5
sick
children
at
the
hospital.
She
could
play
games
with
them.
Boy:
6
a
great
idea!
Now,
how
about
my
mom
What
can
she
do
Woman:
Does
she
want
to
7
today
Boy:
Yes,
she
told
me
she’d
like
to
help
8
people.
Woman:
She
could
collect
some
clothes
and
9
them
in
boxes.
Or...
she
could
give
10
food
at
the
food
bank.
What
do
you
think
she
would
like
to
do
Boy:
I
think
she’d
like
to
give
out
food
at
the
food
bank.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
choose
afternoon
classroom
hear
July
chair
west
interest
thank
get
I
had
always
tried
to
do
something
for
the
children
in
some
poor
villages.
On
a
hot
1
day,
I
joined
a
group
of
volunteers
and
came
to
a
small
village
in
the
2
of
China
to
build
a
library
at
a
primary
school.
After
a
three-hour
ride,
we
3
there
at
last.
The
school
was
poor,
and
we
had
to
4
a
small
room
as
the
library.
Our
job
was
to
move
the
books
into
the
room,
place
them
on
the
shelves
and
set
up
small
tables
and
5
for
the
children.
I
soon
found
the
work
wasn’t
as
6
as
I
had
expected.
We
did
the
same
tiring
things
for
the
whole
morning.
But
in
the
7
,
students
began
to
borrow
books
from
the
library
and
went
back
to
their
8
to
read.
One
student
said
that
he
had
never
seen
so
many
books
and
9
us
again
and
again.
How
happy
I
was
to
10
that!
Then
we
worked
on
and
in
the
end,
a
library
was
created.
It
only
took
us
one
day
to
build
the
library,
but
it
will
make
a
difference
to
the
children’s
lives.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Happiness
is
important
for
everyone.
Most
people
want
to
be
happy,
but
few
know
how
to
find
happiness.
Money
and
success
alone
do
not
bring
lasting
happiness.
Happiness
depends
on
ourselves.
In
other
words,
we
make
our
own
happiness.
Here
are
a
few
ways
to
help
you
be
happier.
The
first
secret
of
happiness
is
to
enjoy
the
simple
things
in
life.
Too
often,
we
spend
so
much
time
thinking
about
the
future—for
example,
getting
into
college
or
getting
a
good
job—that
we
fail
to
enjoy
the
present.
You
should
enjoy
life’s
simple
pleasures,
such
as
reading
a
good
book,
listening
to
your
favorite
music,
or
spending
time
with
close
friends.
People
who
have
several
close
friends
tend
(有……打算)
to
live
happier
and
healthier
lives.
The
second
secret
to
leading
a
happy
life
is
to
be
active.
Many
people
experience
this,
dancing
or
playing
a
sport.
You
can
forget
about
your
problems,
and
only
think
about
the
activity.
Finally,
many
people
find
happiness
in
helping
others.
According
to
studies,
people
feel
good
when
they
volunteer
their
time
to
do
many
meaningful
things
for
other
people.
If
you
want
to
feel
happier,
do
something
nice
for
someone.
Title:
1
What
happiness
depends
on
Happiness
depends
on
2
.
3
to
be
happy
To
enjoy
4
in
life.
To
be
active.
5
.
Conclusion
Happiness
is
important
for
everyone
and
we
make
happiness
by
ourselves.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
My
friend
Paul
is
an
Englishman.
A.
A
week
before
the
Opening
Ceremony,
Paul
got
another
job.
B.
He
wrote
to
me,
“You’re
going
to
see
me
on
TV!
The
guy
who
has
the
biggest
smile
will
be
me!”
C.
This
wasn’t
easy.
D.
This
summer,
he
volunteered
for
the
London
Olympics.
E.
When
athletes
got
hurt,
they
took
care
of
them.
F.
So
during
the
Games,
his
main
job
was
to
help
the
doctors
in
the
swimming
center.
G.
By
the
time
the
Games
stared,
Paul,
together
with
other
volunteers,
had
been
trained
for
about
a
month.
H.
Paul
was
extremely
excited!
I.
He
was
expected
to
stand
hand
in
hand
with
other
volunteers
at
the
Opening
Ceremony
when
the
athletes
enter
the
field.
J.
Paul
studied
medicine
in
university.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
The
way
a
person
feels
inside
is
important.
It
can
be
really
hard
not
to
tell
1
that
you’re
feeling
sad,
worried,
or
upset.
Then,
it’s
just
you
and
these
2
feelings.
If
you
keep
feelings
locked
inside,
it
can
even
3
you
feel
sick!
But
if
you
talk
with
someone
who
4
you,
like
your
mom
or
dad,
you
will
almost
always
start
to
5
better.
Now
you’re
not
all
alone
with
your
problems
or
worries.
It
doesn’t
6
your
problems
and
worries
magically
(神奇地)
get
lost,
but
at
least
someone
else
knows
7
trouble
with
you
is
and
can
help
you
how
to
deal
with
it.
Your
mom
and
dad
want
to
know
if
you
have
8
because
they
love
you
and
they
want
to
know
what’s
happening
in
your
9
.
But
what
if
a
kid
doesn’t
want
to
talk
with
mom
or
dad
Then
find
another
trusted
adult,
10
a
relative
or
a
friend
at
school.
Maybe
this
person
can
help
you
talk
with
your
mom
and
dad
about
your
problem
or
worries.
(
)
1.
A.
someone
B.
somebody
C.
anyone
(
)
2.
A.
bad
B.
happy
C.
pleasure
(
)
3.
A.
keep
B.
make
C.
take
(
)
4.
A.
looks
for
B.
asks
for
C.
cares
for
(
)
5.
A.
feel
B.
sound
C.
smell
(
)
6.
A.
matter
B.
mean
C.
think
(
)
7.
A.
when
B.
why
C.
what
(
)
8.
A.
problems
B.
money
C.
clothes
(
)
9.
A.
school
B.
family
C.
life
(
)
10.A.
as
B.
like
C.
for
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
What
to
do
about
unhappy
Sometimes
we
feel
good,
such
as
when
we
get
good
grades
or
when
something
good
happens.
Sometimes
we
feel
bad,
such
as
when
we
argue
with
our
classmates
or
when
the
teachers
criticize
us.
Both
kinds
of
feelings
are
common.
Of
course,
we
all
enjoy
good
feelings,
but
when
we
feel
unhappy,
sometimes
we
don’t
know
what
to
do
about
it.
Here
is
a
plan
that
will
help
you
when
your
feelings
are
bothering
you.
1.
ACCEPT
your
feelings.
Say
to
yourself,
“I
am
sad.”
“I
am
scared.”
“I
am
angry.”
“I
am
embarrassed.”
It’s
all
right
to
have
these
feelings.
2.
REALS
and
have
a
rest
before
you
act.
Take
slow
deep
breaths
and
relax
your
body.
Imagine
that
you
are
in
a
safe
place.
You
can
listen
to
some
music
or
sing
a
beautiful
song!
3.
THINK
about
ways
to
help
yourself.
Thinking
helps
you
do
something
smart
instead
of
hurting
yourself
or
making
thugs
worse.
4.
DO
something
to
help
yourself.
Maybe
you
can
talk
to
someone,
or
do
something
you
enjoy.
If
it
doesn’t
work,
go
back
to
Step
3.
(
)
1.
We
feel
unhappy
when
______.
A.
we
have
a
fight
with
our
classmates
B.
everything
goes
well
C.
someone
is
proud
of
us
(
)
2.
If
you
want
to
relax
yourself
before
you
act,
you
can
______.
A.
say
to
yourself,
“I
am
sad.”
B.
listen
to
some
music
or
sing
a
beautiful
song
C.
think
about
ways
to
help
yourself
(
)
3.
The
underlined
part
“If
it
doesn’t
work,”
in
the
passage
probably
means
“______”.
A.
If
it
is
broken
B.
If
it
can’t
interest
you
C.
If
it
can’t
help
you
(
)
4.
Which
of
the
following
is
NOT
true
according
to
the
passage
A.
We
felt
good
when
we
won
the
prize
in
the
competition.
B.
We
felt
bad
when
we
lost
our
expensive
things.
C.
We
can
say
to
ourselves
that
we
are
pleased
when
you
feel
bad.
(
)
5.
The
passage
tells
us
______.
A.
what
we
can
do
when
we
feel
unhappy
B.
we
can
do
nothing
when
we
feel
bad
C.
we
all
enjoy
good
feelings,
but
bad
feelings
are
unusual
to
us
B
Colours
and
Moods
Have
you
ever
walked
into
a
room
and
felt
relaxed
It
could
be
because
the
walls
were
painted
blue,
a
calm
and
peaceful
color.
Sometimes
colors
can
affect
our
feelings
and
moods.
Some
colors
can
make
us
feel
calm
and
peaceful.
Blue
is
one
of
these.
Wearing
blue
clothes
or
sleeping
in
a
blue
room
is
good
for
our
mind
and
body,
because
this
color
makes
a
good
feeling.
Blue
is
also
the
color
of
sadness,
so
you
may
say
you’re
feeling
blue
when
you
are
feeling
sad.
White
is
another
calm
color.
You
should
wear
white
clothes
if
you
are
feeling
nervous.
White
is
also
the
color
of
purity
(纯洁).
Many
women
like
to
be
in
white
on
their
wedding
day.
Green
is
the
color
of
nature.
It
can
give
us
more
energy
when
we
are
feeling
tired.
Some
colors
can
make
you
feel
warm.
These
colors
can
give
you
a
happy
feeling.
People
who
live
in
cold
climates
use
warm
colors
in
their
homes
like
orange
and
yellow
instead
of
white
and
blue.
Orange
shows
joy.
It
can
bring
you
success
and
cheer
you
up
when
you
are
feeling
sad.
Yellow
is
the
color
of
the
sun,
so
it
can
remind
you
of
a
warm,
sunny
day.
Yellow
is
also
the
color
of
wisdom.
Some
people
prefer
this
color
when
they
study
for
exams.
For
example,
they
may
use
yellow
school
things.
Red
is
one
of
the
strong
colors.
Wearing
red
often
makes
us
active.
In
short,
we
can
try
out
different
colors
if
we
aren’t
feeling
our
best.
(
)
6.
According
to
the
passage,
which
color
of
the
following
can
make
you
feel
relaxed
A.
Yellow.
B.
Orange.
C.
White.
(
)
7.
What’s
the
meaning
of
the
sentence
“She
is
blue
today.”
A.
She
is
angry.
B.
She
is
sad.
C.
She
is
bored.
(
)
8.
Some
students
prefer
yellow
rulers
or
erasers
when
they
study
for
exams
because
yellow
is
the
color
of
______.
A.
wisdom
B.
purity
C.
nature
(
)
9.
According
to
the
passage,
which
of
the
following
is
NOT
true
A.
People
who
live
in
cold
climates
had
better
paint
the
walls
of
their
houses
white.
B.
Many
women
like
to
be
in
white
on
their
wedding
day
because
it’s
the
color
of
purity.
C.
Sometimes
colors
can
affect
our
feelings
and
moods.
(
)
10.
Is
red
a
strong
color
or
a
peaceful
color
A.
Yes,
it
is.
B.
No,
it
isn’t.
C.
A
strong
color.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
The
most
unhappy
day
in
my
life
was
that
day
my
father
was
in
bed
forever.
On
the
day
before
going
to
work,
I
was
a
little
surprised
that
my
father
was
still
1
.
I
thought
to
myself,
“Is
he
okay ”
I
came
to
his
bed
and
called
him,
but
there
was
no
answer.
Panicking
(惊慌失措地),
I
shook
his
hands
and
2
he
was
not
breathing.
My
heart
was
broken
and
I
3
out.
Soon
many
people
4
into
the
house—they
couldn’t
believe
my
father
was
5
.
Just
the
evening
before,
they
still
saw
my
father
6
his
usual
walk
in
the
rice
field.
I
held
his
cold
hand
and
I
didn’t
want
to
leave
him.
I
knew
it
was
the
last
time
I
would
sit
beside
him.
My
father
was
my
best
friend.
When
I
felt
sad,
he
was
always
there
for
me.
He
provided
me
7
all
I
could
ever
ask
for.
Until
my
father’s
death,
I
realized
8
else
could
make
me
happier
than
a
peaceful
day
with
both
my
parents
by
my
side.
My
family
is
my
happiness.
I’ll
never
9
the
happiness
my
father
brought
to
me.
10
I
feel
sad
or
think
about
something,
I
whisper
(低声说)
to
him,
“Daddy,
where
are
you
Are
you
there ”
It
brings
me
peace
because
I
know
somewhere
he
is
listening.
(
)
1.
A.
awake
B.
alive
C.
asleep
(
)
2.
A.
described
B.
decided
C.
discovered
(
)
3.
A.
spoke
B.
cried
C.
laughed
(
)
4.
A.
rushed
B.
left
C.
fell
(
)
5.
A.
lively
B.
sick
C.
dead
(
)
6.
A.
going
B.
setting
C.
taking
(
)
7.
A.
to
B.
with
C.
at
(
)
8.
A.
something
B.
anything
C.
nothing
(
)
9.
A.
forget
B.
make
C.
miss
(
)
10.
A.
Whenever
B.
Anywhere
C.
However
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
A
man
didn’t
like
his
wife’s
cat
and
decided
to
throw
it
away.
One
day,
he
drove
over
1.6
miles
from
his
home
and
left
the
cat
in
a
park.
But
when
he
got
home,
he
saw
that
his
wife
was
playing
with
the
cat.
The
next
day
he
drove
about
3
miles
away.
He
put
the
cat
on
the
street
and
went
home.
But,
once
again,
the
cat
got
home
before
him.
At
last
he
decided
to
drive
more
than
10
miles
away.
He
turned
right,
then
left,
passed
a
bridge,
then
turned
right
again
and
made
another
right,
until
he
thought
he
was
far
enough
form
home
and
left
the
cat
there.
Hours
later,
he
found
he
was
lost.
He
called
home
and
asked
his
wife:
“Is
the
cat
there ”
“Yes,”
his
wife
answers.
“Why
do
you
ask ”
“Put
the
cat
on
the
phone,
I’m
lost
and
need
it
to
tell
me
the
way.”
What
a
clever
cat!
(
)
1.
The
man
liked
his
wife’s
cat
very
much.
(
)
2.
One
day,
he
left
the
cat
in
a
park.
(
)
3.
The
next
day
the
cat
got
home
after
him.
(
)
4.
At
last
the
man
found
he
was
lost
himself.
(
)
5.
The
cat
was
very
clever.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
Mother:
I’m
tired
of
all
the
rain,
John.
It
makes
me
1
like
crying.
John:
Well,
let’s
do
something.
The
2
makes
me
bored.
Mother:
I
know!
Let’s
go
out
to
3
.
Call
your
friend,
Maria,
and
see
4
she
wants
to
go.
John:
5
great!
Where
do
you
want
to
go
Mother:
Let’s
go
to
that
new
6
,
the
Blue
Lagoon.
It
looks
really
pretty
on
the
outside.
John:
I
went
7
last
night
with
Maria.
It
is
a
nice
restaurant,
but
the
8
is
so
soft
that
it
made
me
sleepy.
Mother:
Okay.
9
would
you
like
to
go
John:
I
like
a
louder
atmosphere.
The
loud
music
at
Joe’s
Restaurant
will
make
us
energetic.
Mother:
I
don’t
know...
Loud
music
usually
makes
me
tense.
John:
It’s
not
that
loud.
And
it’s
a
great
band.
You
might
10
want
to
dance!
Mother:
I
like
this
plan,
let’s
do
it!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
I
beat
teach
interest
guest
sky
light
reply
face
end
Last
spring
I
was
walking
in
a
park.
In
front
of
me
there
was
a
mum
and
her
3-year-old
daughter.
The
little
girl
was
holding
a
string
(线),
which
had
a
balloon
at
the
other
1
.
All
of
a
sudden,
a
2
wind
took
the
balloon
from
the
little
girl.
I
thought
she
would
cry.
But,
no!
As
the
little
girl
turned
to
watch
her
balloon
rise
to
the
3
,
she
cheerfully
shouted
out,
“Wow!”
That
little
girl
4
me
something.
Later
that
day,
I
received
a
phone
call
from
my
friend,
he
told
me
an
unexpected
problem.
I
felt
like
5
with
“Oh
no,
what
should
we
do ”
But
remembering
that
little
girl,
I
found
6
saying,
“Wow,
that
is
interesting!
How
can
I
help
you ”
One
thing
is
for
sure－life
is
always
going
to
make
us
7
unexpected
problems,
however,
how
to
deal
with
them
is
our
choice.
We
can
choose
to
be
annoyed
or
8
.
No
matter
what
the
situation
is,
a
“Wow!”
will
always
9
“Oh,
no.”
So
the
next
time
you
meet
one
of
life’s
unexpected
10
,
remember
that
little
girl
and
make
it
a
“Wow!”
experience.
The
“Wow!”
always
works.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Do
you
want
to
be
the
most
popular
person
in
the
class
You
don’t
need
to
change
your
character;
you
just
need
to
improve
your
personality.
The
most
popular
people
are
trusted
(信任)
and
loved
because
they
stay
normal
but
still
have
something
that
makes
them
different
from
the
rest
of
us.
Here
are
some
pieces
of
advice
on
how
to
become
the
most
popular
person
in
the
class.
·If
you
want
others
to
like
and
respect
(尊重)
you,
you
have
to
start
by
liking
yourself.
Do
not
change
yourself
in
order
to
please
others.
·Be
helpful
to
everyone
and
d
it
happily.
Being
nice
to
people
is
almost
like
helping
them,
too,
because
by
being
nice
you
make
others
happy.
·Be
active
and
have
a
positive
attitude
(积极的态度)
towards
life.
Develop
confidence
in
yourself.
·Stay
clean
and
wear
fresh
clothes.
Do
not
try
to
follow
fashion
to
please
others.
Respect
cannot
be
bought
with
big
words
or
money.
You
have
to
get
it
by
being
honest.
It
also
helps
your
personal
growth.
You
must
be
a
person
that
can
be
trusted
to
get
respect.
To
be
a
popular
person
Something
you
don’t
need
to
do
·Don’t
try
to
1
or
change
yourself
to
make
others
pleased.·You
can’t
get
respect
with
big
words
or
money.
Something
you
need
to
do
·Win
others’
respect
2
.·Be
honest,
helpful
and
nice
to
everyone.·Have
an
3
towards
life
and
develop
confidence
in
yourself.·Wear
fresh
clothes
and
4
.
Conclusion
Improve
your
personality
instead
of
5
,
and
you
will
be
popular.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
It
was
a
hot
sunny
day,
a
crow
(乌鸦)
felt
very
thirsty.
A.
But
the
mouth
of
the
bottle
was
too
narrow
and
the
crow
couldn’t
drink
the
water.
B.
He
flew
out
and
looked
for
some
water
to
drink.
C.
At
last,
it
was
high
enough
to
reach.
D.
Suddenly,
he
found
a
bottle
lying
on
the
ground.
E.
The
crow
could
have
a
good
drink
from
the
bottle.
How
clever
the
crow
was!
F.
So
the
surface
of
the
water
became
higher
and
higher.
G.
He
flew
over
to
the
bottle.
There
was
a
little
water
in
it.
H.
He
thought
hard.
He
found
there
were
a
lot
of
little
stones
around
the
bottle.
I.
The
crow
picked
up
the
stones
one
by
one
and
put
them
into
the
bottle.
J.
Then
he
had
a
good
idea.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
When
I
was
about
12,
a
girl
in
my
class
liked
to
point
out
my
problems.
I
was
too
thin;
I
wasn’t
a
good
student;
I
talked
too
much;
I
was
too
1
,
and
so
on.
At
last,
I
became
very
angry
and
ran
to
my
father.
He
listened
to
me
2
.
Then
he
asked,
“Are
these
things
true
or
not
Do
you
know
what
you
are
really
like
Go
and
make
a
3
of
what
she
said
and
find
the
4
that
are
true.”
I
did
as
he
told
me.
To
my
great
5
,
I
discovered
that
about
half
of
the
things
were
true.
Some
of
them
I
couldn’t
change.
But
there
were
things
I
could
and
wanted
to
change.
For
the
6
time,
I
got
a
clear
7
of
myself.
I
brought
the
list
back
to
Dad.
He
refused
to
take
it.
“That’s
just
for
you.”
he
said.
“You
know
the
truth
about
8
better
than
anyone
else.
When
people
say
something
that
is
true
about
you,
you
should
find
it
helpful.”
Our
world
is
full
of
people
who
think
they
know
your
business.
Don’t
9
and
feel
10
.
Listen
to
them.
(
)
1.
A.
beautiful
B.
proud
C
smart
(
)
2.
A.
quietly
B.
happily
C.
quickly
(
)
3.
A.
joke
B.
programme
C.
list
(
)
4.
A.
secrets
B.
points
C.
lessons
(
)
5.
A.
surprise
B.
interest
C.
fact
(
)
6.
A.
first
B.
second
C.
next
(
)
7.
A.
book
B.
picture
C.
drawing
(
)
8.
A.
yourselves
B.
myself
C.
yourself
(
)
9.
A.
clean
B.
open
C.
close
(
)
10.
A.
hurt
B.
safe
C.
pretty
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Why
do
plants
grow
in
some
places
and
not
in
others
Why
does
some
land
have
so
much
growing
on
it,
while
other
land
has
almost
no
plants
growing
on
it
at
all
To
grow,
plants
need
several
things.
One
is
warmth.
In
very
cold
places
almost
nothing
grows.
Plants
also
need
water.
In
very
dry
parts
of
the
Earth
only
a
few
unusual
plants
can
grow.
That’s
why
dry
deserts
everywhere
are
almost
not
covered
by
trees
or
grass.
Plants
must
also
have
a
place
in
which
to
put
down
their
roots
and
grow.
They
find
it
difficult
to
grow
on
hard
land.
The
town
is
built
on
hard
land.
The
plants
here
have
only
the
soil
found
between
the
cracks
of
the
stones
to
grow
in.
Another
thing
plants
must
have
before
they
can
grow
is
food.
What
will
happen
if
we
try
to
make
things
grow
on
the
sandy
beach
A
few
plants,
such
as
beach
grass,
will
grow
in
sand,
but
most
plants
won’t.
Even
if
the
weather
is
warm
enough
and
we
water
the
plants
each
day,
many
of
them
will
die
because
the
sand
on
this
beach
has
almost
no
food
for
plants.
(
)
1.
According
to
the
passage,
plants
need
______
things
to
grow
well.
A.
two
B.
three
C.
four
(
)
2.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“cracks”
mean
in
the
text
A.
缝隙.
B.
表面.
C.
夹层.
(
)
3.
From
the
passage,
we
can
know
it
is
______
for
plants
to
grow
in
dry
places.
A.
easy
B.
difficult
C.
impossible
(
)
4.
The
reason
why
most
plants
can’t
grow
on
the
sandy
beach
is
that
______.
A.
there
isn’t
enough
sunlight
B.
there
is
too
much
water
C.
it
has
little
food
for
plants
(
)
5.
The
passage
can
most
probably
be
found
in
a
______book.
A.
science
B.
history
C.
travel
B
The
Chinese
first
made
paper
about
2,000
years
ago.
China
still
has
pieces
of
paper
which
were
made
as
long
ago
as
that.
But
Chinese
paper
was
not
made
from
the
wood
of
trees.
It
was
made
from
the
hair—like
parts
of
certain
plants.
Paper
was
not
made
in
southern
Europe
until
about
the
year
1100.
Scandinavia
(斯供的纳维亚半岛),
which
now
makes
a
great
deal
of
the
world’s
paper,
did
not
begin
to
make
it
until
1500.
It
was
a
German
named
Schaeffer
who
found
out
that
one
could
make
the
best
paper
from
trees.
After
that,
the
forest
countries
of
Sweden,
Norway,
Finland,
and
the
United
States
became
the
largest
paper
producers.
Today
in
Finland,
which
makes
the
best
paper
in
the
world,
the
paper
industry
is
the
biggest
in
the
land.
New
paper-making
machines
are
very
big,
and
they
make
paper
very
fast.
The
biggest
machines
can
make
a
piece
of
paper
300
meters
long
and
6
meters
wide
in
one
minute.
When
we
think
of
paper,
we
think
of
newspapers,
books,
letters,
envelopes
and
writing
paper.
But
there
are
many
other
uses.
Only
half
of
the
paper
that
is
made
is
used
for
books
and
newspapers,
etc.
(
)
6.
Which
of
the
following
is
the
first
to
make
paper
A.
China.
B.
Scandinavia.
C.
Germany.
(
)
7.
Schaeffer
found
out
that
.
A.
the
best
paper
was
in
the
forest
B.
a
German
made
the
best
paper
C.
wood
could
be
made
into
the
best
paper
(
)
8.
What
docs
the
underlined
word
“industry”
mean
in
Chinese
A.
农业
D.
工业
C.
国防
(
)
9.
According
to
the
passage,
paper
is
not
used
for
______.
A.
newspaper
B.
envelops
C.
food
and
drinks
(
)
10.
The
second
paragraph
mainly
talks
about
paper
making.
A.
in
the
United
States
B.
in
Scandinavia
C.
in
Europe
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Yang
Mi,
born
in
Beijing
on
September
12,
1986,
is
a
Chinese
mainland
actress.
At
the
age
of
4,
she
got
her
first
TV
drama
role;
at
16,
she
became
a
model
for
a
fashion
magazine;
at
18,
she
went
to
her
dream
college
—
Beijing
Film
Academy
(北京电影学院).
1
believe
that
life
has
smiled
on
her.
Last
year,
the
24-year-old
2
played
bad
girl
Luo
Qingchuan
in
the
time-traveling
TV
drama,
Palace
(《宫锁心玉》).
The
drama
became
a
big
success
and
made
Yang
very
3
.
The
number
of
her
micro
blog
followers
4
from
several
thousand
to
more
than
three
million
overnight.
Could
she
be
any
5

Yang
doesn’t
think
luck
had
anything
to
6
with
her
success.
She
makes
her
way
all
by
herself.
“Every
7
is
from
the
efforts
I’ve
made,”
said
Yang.
People
now
think
she’s
very
hard-working.
She
still
recalls
the
time
when
people
gave
her
the
cold
shoulder.
Some
treated
her
with
little
respect.
They
didn’t
want
to
help
her
in
her
time
of
need.
“I
have
to
8
them
because
they
make
me
believe
myself,”
she
said.
That’s
9
she
always
help
others
when
they
are
in
need.
In
May,
Yang
became
the
ambassador
(大使)
10
the
Climate
Group.
She
calls
on
people
to
join
the
Million-Miracle
project
and
plant
trees
on
China’s
dry
land.
In
April,
2009,
Yang
Mi
was
considered
a
member
of
the
Four
Young
Dan
actresses
(四小花旦)
along
with
Huang
Shengyi,
Wang
Luodan,
Liu
Yifei.
(
)
1.
A.
Many
B.
Some
C.
Nobody
(
)
2.
A.
student
B.
actress
C.
player
(
)
3.
A.
great
B.
rich
C.
famous
(
)
4.
A.
were
B.
became
C.
increased
(
)
5.
A.
happier
B.
luckier
C.
healthier
(
)
6.
A.
do
B.
play
C.
stay
(
)
7.
A.
play
B.
chance
C.
dream
(
)
8.
A.
help
B.
ask
C.
thank
(
)
9.
A.
because
B.
why
C.
what
(
)
10.
A.
for
B.
at
C.
with
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Once
a
circle
missed
a
wedge
(楔子).
The
circle
wanted
to
be
whole,
so
it
went
around
looking
for
its
missing
piece.
But
because
it
was
incomplete
and
therefore
could
roll
only
very
slowly.
It
admired
the
flowers
along
the
way.
It
chatted
with
grasses.
It
enjoyed
the
sunshine.
It
found
lots
of
different
pieces,
but
none
of
them
fit.
So
it
left
them
all
by
the
side
of
the
road
and
kept
on
searching.
Then
one
day
the
circle
found
a
piece
that
fit
perfectly.
It
was
so
happy.
It
put
the
found
piece
into
itself
and
began
to
roll.
Now
it
was
a
perfect
circle,
it
could
roll
very
fast,
too
fast
to
notice
the
flowers
or
to
talk
to
the
grasses.
When
it
rolled
so
quickly,
it
realized
how
different
the
world
seemed.
Then
it
stopped,
left
the
found
piece
by
the
side
of
the
road
and
rolled
slowly
away.
The
lesson
of
the
story,
I
suggested,
was
that
in
some
strange
sense
we
are
more
whole
when
we
are
missing
something.
The
man
who
has
everything
isn’t
in
some
ways
a
whole
man.
He
will
never
know
what
it
feels
like
to
yearn
(渴望),
to
hope,
to
come
true
the
dream
of
something
better.
(
)
1.
At
first,
the
circle
couldn’t
roll
fast,
because
it
wanted
to
chat
with
the
grasses.
(
)
2.
The
circle
didn’t
find
the
missing
piece
at
last.
(
)
3.
When
it
was
a
perfect
circle,
it
rolled
too
fast
to
notice
the
flowers
or
to
talk
to
the
grasses.
(
)
4.
The
circle
stopped
by
the
side
of
the
road
and
enjoyed
the
sunshine.
(
)
5.
In
some
days,
a
man
still
will
be
perfect
even
if
he
misses
something.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
(Betty
is
talking
with
her
friend
Daming
on
the
phone.)
Daming:
Hello,
this
is
Daming.
Who’s
1

Betty:
This
is
Betty.
I
want
to
visit
your
2
—Tianjin.
Can
you
give
me
some
3

Daming:
Of
4
.
What
do
you
want
to
know
Betty:
Is
it
very
hot
in
summer
Daming:
Yes,
you
are
5
.
It’s
usually
very
hot
in
summer.
Betty:
When
is
the
best
time
to
visit
Tianjin
Daming:
I
think
you’d
6
come
in
October.
Betty:
Why
do
you
think
7

Daming:
Because
the
weather
starts
to
get
cooler
and
the
trees
start
to
8
colour.
Betty:
What
can
I
do
there
Daming:
You
can
visit
many
places
of
interest
here,
such
9
Tianjin
Ancient
Culture
Street
and
you
can
also
try
some
traditional
Chinese
food.
Betty:
I’m
looking
forward
to
10
Tianjin.
Thank
you
for
your
suggestions.
Bye-bye.
Daming:
Bye-bye.
I
hope
to
see
you
soon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
all
any
behave
difference
drink
eat
enjoy
fine
other
real
surprise
these
Once
there
was
a
teacher
who
took
all
his
students
for
tea.
What
made
the
students
1
was
that
all
the
cups
on
the
table
were
2
.
Each
of
them
took
a
cup
and
started
3
their
own
tea,
looking
at
the
4
cups.
The
teacher
said:
“Do
you
notice
your
5

You
are
all
looking
at
each
other’s
tea
cups
and
6
of
you
even
envy
(羡慕)
the
7
cups
of
others.”
Then
he
went
on:
“I
put
the
different
cups
here
on
purpose!
Life
is
like
8
tea.
You
all
have
the
same
thing
in
your
cups—
tea.
And
yet
you
can’t
9
enjoy
it
in
your
envy
of
another’s
cup.
You
forget
10
your
own
life
when
you
envy
someone
else’s
life.
So
now,
taste
your
own
tea!
Does
it
matter
from
which
cup
it
comes
from ”
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Trees
are
one
of
the
oldest
citizens
(公民)
of
our
earth.
Just
like
us,
trees
change
a
lot
when
they
grow.
At
one
to
three
years
old,
young
trees
learn
how
to
protect
themselves.
For
example,
many
trees
grow
thorns
(刺)
to
tell
animals
not
to
go
near.
Most
young
trees
have
large,
deep
green
leaves
so
that
they
can
catch
enough
sunlight
and
change
it
into
their
food
and
energy.
When
trees
are
4
years
old,
they
begin
to
grow
very
fast
and
become
strong
enough
to
face
challenges
(挑战)
in
life.
At
the
age
of
15,
trees
become
young
adults.
They
grow
more
slowly
and
begin
to
produce
flowers
and
fruit.
It
is
not
until
the
trees
are
20
to
25
years
old
that
they
become
real
adults.
The
trees
reach
their
largest
sizes.
Adult
trees
give
us
many
things
such
as
oxygen
(氧气)
and
natural
beauty.
If
we
give
them
good
care,
they
will
go
on
to
live
healthily
for
many
years.
As
time
goes
on,
trees
begin
to
grow
older
and
older
and
even
die.
At
this
time,
they
still
have
their
important
place
in
nature.
In
many
ways,
the
life
of
trees
is
like
our
own
life
experience.
Enjoy
every
minute
of
the
life
of
the
trees
and
take
care
of
them!
Title:
1.
of
Trees
Age
Growing
Things
they
can
do
1～3
Growing
thorns;Having
large,
deep
green
leaves
Learn
to
protect
themselves；2.
Catch
enough
and
change
it
into
their
food
and
.
4
Growing
very
fast;Becoming
strong
enough
3.
Face
challenges
.
15
Becoming
young
adults;Growing
more
slowly
4.
Produce
and
.
20～25
5.
Becoming
;Reaching
their
largest
sizes
Give
people
many
things
like
oxygen
and
natural
beauty.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
Thirty
years
ago,
few
Chinese
knew
about
American
TV
series,
though
during
the
1980s
and
1990s,
Chinese
people
got
the
chance
to
watch
some
U.S.A.
TV
series
like
Growing
Pains.
Now,
1
Chinese
people
have
more
chances
to
enjoy
foreign
TV
series.
Some
American
TV
series
such
as
2
have
become
very
popular
among
young
Chinese
English
learners.
In
their
opinion,
watching
American
TV
series
is
a
good
way
to
learn
English
and
American
culture.
They
have
other
reasons
to
support
that
point
of
view.
First,
it’s
easy
and
convenient
for
learners
to
manage
their
learning
time.
They
don’t
have
to
worry
about
the
place
and
time
to
learn.
3
they
can
start
watching
and
learning.
All
they
need
to
do
is
to
turn
on
their
computers
and
put
on
their
earphones.
The
stories
in
the
TV
series
also
play
an
important
role
in
attracting
more
learners.
Different
cultures
between
China
and
the
Western
countries
and
exciting
story
lines
get
young
people
interested
in
watching
and
learning.
4
Besides,
watching
American
TV
series
can
help
learners
improve
their
listening
and
speaking
skills.
English
learners
may
find
it
hard
to
find
a
native
speaker
to
talk
with,
5
they
can
listen
to
native
speakers
and
follow
their
conversations
as
much
as
they
can.
A.
Any
time
they
are
free,B.
American
culture
and
Chinese
cultureC.
Friends
and
Prison
Break
D.
They
also
feel
relaxed
at
the
same
time.E.
with
the
fast
development
of
DVDs
and
the
Internet,F.
but
in
the
TV
series,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Keep your dream
When
Robert
was
a
student
in
high
school,
his
teacher
asked
him
to
write
a
composition
about
what
he
wanted
to
do
when
he
grew
up.
That
night
he
wrote
a
seven-page
composition
about
his
1
of
owning
a
horse
ranch
(养马场).
He
2
about
it
in
detail
(详细地),
and
he
even
drew
a
picture
of
a
200-
acre
(亩)
ranch.
The
next
day
he
handed
it
in
to
his
3
.
Two
days
later
he
got
his
composition
back.
On
the
first
page
was
a
larger
F
with
a
note
(批注)
that
4
,
“See
me
after
class.”
Robert
went
to
see
his
teacher
after
class
and
asked,
“
5
did
I
get
an
F ”
The
teacher
said,
“You
have
no
money.
Your
parents
have
no
money.
Owning
a
horse
ranch
6
a
lot
of
money.
You
have
to
buy
the
land.
You
have
to
buy
the
7
.
There’s
no
way
you
could
ever
do
it.
8
you
write
a
composition
again,
I
will
change
your
9
.”
Robert
went
back
home
and
thought
about
it
long
and
hard.
The
next
day
he
handed
in
the
same
composition,
making
no
changes
10
.
He
said
to
his
teacher,
“You
can
keep
the
F
and
I’ll
keep
my
dream.”
Now,
Robert
owns
a
200-acre
horse
ranch.
(
)
1.
A.
plan
B.
project
C.
dream
(
)
2.
A.
worried

B.
wrote

C.
cared
(
)
3.
A.
mother
B.
father
C.
teacher
(
)
4.
A.
read

B.
told
C.
replied
(
)
5.
A.
How
B.
Why
C.
When
(
)
6.
A.
makes
B.
saves
C.
needs
(
)
7.
A.
horses
B.
houses
C.
farms
(
)
8.
A.
Because
B.
Although
C.
If
(
)
9.
A.
idea
B.
grade
C.
goal
(
)
10.
A.
at once
B.
at least
C.
at all
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
The
first
teacher-parent
meeting
would
be
held
in
the
school.
To
the
little
boy’s
disappointment
(失望),
his
mother
said
she
would
go.
He
felt
sorry
for
her
face.
She
was
very
beautiful,
but
there
was
a
big
scar
(疤痕)
on
her
right
face.
The
boy
never
talked
about
it
with
his
mother.
At
the
meeting,
the
people
noticed
the
mother’s
kindness
and
beauty
though
she
had
the
scar.
But
the
little
boy
hid
himself.
After
the
meeting,
the
teacher
asked
his
mother
carefully,
“How
did
you
get
the
scar
on
your
face ”
The
mother
answered,
“When
my
son
was
a
baby,
he
was
once
in
a
room
that
caught
fire.
Everyone
was
too
afraid
to
go
in
because
the
fire
was
out
of
control.
At
that
time,
I
rushed
in.
As
I
was
running
towards
his
bed,
I
saw
a
piece
of
wood
coming
towards
his
bed.
I
threw
myself
over
him
to
protect
him.
I
was
knocked
down.
Luckily,
a
fireman
came
in
and
saved
both
of
us.
But
I
got
the
scar.”
She
touched
her
face,
“This
scar
will
be
here
for
ever,
but
I
have
never
felt
sorry
for
what
I
did.”
At
that
moment,
the
little
boy
came
out
with
his
eyes
wet.
He
held
his
mother’s
hand
for
the
rest
of
the
day.
(
)
1.
The
boy
______
when
his
mother
decided
to
go
to
his
first
teacher-parent
meeting.
A.
was
happy
B.
felt
disappointed
C.
was
angry
(
)
2.
The
boy
was
sorry
for
his
mother
because
______.
A.
his
mother
was
not
beautiful
B.
he
didn’t
love
his
mother
C.
there
was
a
big
scar
on
her
face
(
)
3.
Which
of
the
following
is
TRUE
A.
The
mother
told
the
teacher
about
the
scar
after
the
meeting.
B.
The
boy
told
his
classmates
why
his
mother
got
the
scar.
C.
The
mother
told
the
boy
about
the
scar
many
times.
(
)
4.
The
mother
got
the
scar
when
she
______.
A.
slept
in
a
room
on
fire
B.
protected
her
son
C.
rushed
out
of
the
room
(
)
5.
The
boy
was
______
when
he
knew
the
truth
at
last.
A.
moved
B.
sad
C.
bored
B
Last
week
was
Road
Safety
Week
at
Jason’s
school.
All
the
students
had
to
take
part
in
a
talk
on
road
safety
which
was
given
by
a
police
officer.
The
following
is
what
the
police
officer
said.
“Most
traffic
accidents
shouldn’t
happen.
They
happen
because
people
are
careless.
A
frequent
cause
of
traffic
accidents
is
speed.
Some
people
drive
too
quickly.
This
means
that
if
they
have
to
stop
suddenly,
they
cannot
stop
quickly
enough
to
avoid
hitting
other
cars
or
people.
You
need
to
remember
this
when
you
are
crossing
the
street
or
walking
along
the
sidewalk.
“It’s
not
only
drivers
who
cause
accidents,
however.
People
on
foot
pedestrians,
and
bicycle
riders
often
cause
accidents,
too.
Pedestrians
sometimes
walk
out
into
the
street
without
looking.
You
should
always
look
on
both
sides
before
stepping
into
the
street.
“Do
any
of
you
ride
a
bike
Bicycle
riders
can
cause
accidents
by
changing
directions
suddenly
or
without
warning
other
road
users.
Before
you
turn
left,
for
example,
you
should
check
behind
you
to
make
sure
there
aren’t
any
cars,
trucks
or
buses
coming.
You
should
show
with
your
left
hand
to
tell
that
you
want
to
turn
left.
You
should
not
turn
until
the
street
is
clear.
“The
rules
of
the
road
are
very
simple.
If
we
learn
them
and
obey
them,
we
should
not
have
accidents
any
more.”
(
)
6.
The
main
idea
of
the
story
is
______.
A.
obeying
the
rules
of
the
road
can
keep
you
from
having
accidents
B.
it
was
Road
Safety
Week
at
Jason’s
school
C.
it’s
not
only
drivers
who
cause
traffic
accidents
(
)
7.
Why
do
most
traffic
accidents
happen
A.
Because
people
stop
their
cars
suddenly.
B.
Because
people
don’t
know
the
rules.
C.
Because
people
are
careless.
(
)
8.
How
can
bicycle
riders
cause
accidents
A.
By
crossing
the
road
without
warning
other
road
users.
B.
By
turning
suddenly
or
without
warning
other
road
users.
C.
By
making
sure
there
aren’t
any
cars
coming.
(
)
9.
The
word
“frequent”
in
the
passage
means
______
in
Chinese.
A.
频繁的
B.
偶尔的
C.
所有的
(
)
10.
Which
of
the
following
is
the
best
title
of
this
passage
A.
Road
Safety
Week
B.
A
Talk
on
Safety
C.
Safety
First
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
A
young
man
was
interested
in
jade
(玉)
stones.
So
he
went
to
Mr.
Smith,
a
gemologist
(玉石家),
to
learn
from
him.
Mr.
Smith
refused
because
he
feared
that
the
young
man
would
not
have
the
1
to
learn.
The
young
man
asked
for
a
chance
again
and
again.
2
Mr.
Smith
agreed
and
told
him,
“Be
here
tomorrow.”
The
next
morning
the
young
man
came.
Mr.
Smith
put
a
jade
stone
in
the
young
man’s
hand
and
told
him
to
3
it.
He
then
went
about
his
work.
The
young
man
sat
quietly
and
waited.
The
following
morning,
Mr.
Smith
again
4
a
jade
stone
in
the
young
man’s
hand
and
told
him
to
hold
it.
On
the
third,
fourth,
and
5
day,
Mr.
Smith
did
the
same
thing
and
repeated
his
6
.
On
the
sixth
day,
the
young
man
held
the
jade
stone,
7
he
could
no
longer
stand
the
silence.
“When
am
I
going
to
learn
something ”
asked
the
young
man.
“You
will
learn,”
said
Mr.
Smith
and
went
about
his
work.
Several
more
days
went
by
and
the
young
man
felt
very
8
.
One
morning
he
was
asked
to
do
it
once
more.
As
soon
as
he
held
it,
the
young
man
shouted
9
looking
at
his
hand,
“This
is
not
the
same
jade
stone!”
“You
have
begun
to
10
.”
said
Mr.
Smith.
(
)
1.
A.
chance
B.
ability
C.
patience
(
)
2.
A.
Finally
B.
Slowly
C.
Quickly
(
)
3.
A.
cut
B.
hold
C.
touch
(
)
4.
A.
placed
B.
took
C.
gave
(
)
5.
A.
third
B.
fourth
C.
fifth
(
)
6.
A.
instructions
B.
suggestions
C.
promises
(
)
7.
A.
and
B.
but
C.
or
(
)
8.
A.
unhappy
B.
excited
C.
surprised
(
)
9.
A.
at
B.
on
C.
without
(
)
10.
A.
refuse
B.
learn
C.
accept
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Audio
digital
books
(有声图书)
are
becoming
more
and
more
popular
these
years.
One
of
the
reasons
for
this
is
that
audio
digital
books
can
be
“read”
in
many
places
comfortably.
The
first
favorite
place
of
many
people
is
in
bed,
before
going
to
sleep.
Many
people
like
to
just
lie
in
bed
in
the
dark
before
they
fall
asleep
at
night.
This
would
be
the
perfect
time
to
listen
to
an
audio
digital
book.
If
you
read
an
ordinary
book,
the
lights
have
to
be
turned
on
and
you
have
to
turn
the
pages
with
your
hand.
An
audio
book
can
just
be
listened
to
while
a
person
stays
comfortably
in
bed.
The
next
favorite
place
of
many
to
listen
to
audio
digital
books
would
be
in
the
kitchen.
For
some
people
kitchen
chores
are
boring.
Audio
digital
books
provide
good
entertainment,
and
people
don’t
need
to
turn
pages.
An
audio
digital
book
is
a
favorite
while
a
person
is
gardening.
They
can
help
take
a
person’s
mind
off
job
at
hand.
It
can
be
fun
and
exciting
to
do
gardening
with
the
help
of
these
books.
An
audio
digital
book
is
a
favorite
while
a
person
is
exercising.
It
allows
the
mind
to
be
free
while
the
legs,
body
and
arms
are
kept
busy.
This
would
be
a
great
place
to
listen
to
these
books.
(
)
1.
Audio
digital
books
are
becoming
more
and
more
popular
these
years.
(
)
2.
People
are
able
to
enjoy
their
evening
reading
comfortably
because
of
audio
digital
books.
(
)
3.
People
in
the
kitchen
are
too
bored
to
listen
to
audio
digital
books.
(
)
4.
Audio
digital
books
are
suitable
for
either
gardeners
or
sportsmen
to
“read”
while
they
are
working.
(
)
5.
The
passage
is
mainly
about
where
people
like
to
“read”
audio
digital
books.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
David:
Excuse
me,
sir.
Could
you
please
tell
me
the
way
1
the
Space
Museum
Man:
2
,
I’m
new
here.
David:
Thank
you
3
the
same.
(Then
David
goes
and
asks
a
woman
for
help.)
David:
Excuse
me,
could
you
tell
me
4
I
can
get
to
the
Space
Museum
Woman:
Sure.
Go
5
this
street.
When
you
reach
the
traffic
lights,
turn
left.
At
the
6
of
the
road,
you’ll
see
it.
David:
It’s
very
kind
7
you.
By
the
way,
is
it
far
from
here
Woman:
No,
it
is
not
very
far.
David:
Can
I
8
a
bus
to
get
there
Woman:
Certainly.
David:
9
bus
can
I
take
Woman:
You
can
take
the
No.
17
bus.
David:
Thank
you
very
much.
Woman:
It’s
my
10
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
but
give
nobody
history
patient
everyone
tired
look
cheer
teacher
always
million
In
my
life,
I
have
a
lot
of
friends,
1
there
is
a
special
one
who
I’m
the
most
thankful
to.
I
first
knew
him
when
I
began
to
go
to
school.
He
has
been
with
me
ever
since.
Though
he
2
serious,
he
is
really
fun
as
you
get
close
to
him.
He
is
very
quiet,
smart
and
knowledgeable.
He
knows
every
language
of
the
world,
all
the
events
of
3
,
all
the
thoughts
of
great
scientists
and
so
on.
He
is
admired
(钦佩)
by
4
who
meets
him.
To
me,
he
has
been
a
great
5
as
well.
He
first
taught
me
the
secrets
of
my
own
language
and
then
those
of
others.
With
these
keys,
he
showed
us
how
to
unlock
all
the
arts
and
sciences
of
man.
My
friend
is
quite
6
.
Although
I
am
slow
in
understanding,
I
can
return
to
him
again
and
again,
and
he
is
7
ready
to
teach
me.
When
I
am
8
,
he
makes
me
relaxed.
When
I
am
lonely,
he
stays
with
me
silently.
When
I
am
sad,
he
9
me
up.
He
is
a
friend
not
only
to
me,
but
also
to
10
of
people
around
the
world.
Shall
I
tell
you
his
name
His
name
is
“Reading”.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
How
to
Beat
Sadness
We
all
have
days
when
we
are
down,
tired
and
unhappy.
That’s
OK.
You
need
days
like
this,
or
how
would
you
know
you
are
happy
You’ll
enjoy
your
good
days
even
more
when
you
have
a
few
bad
days.
Even
if
sadness
is
a
part
of
life,
let’s
try
to
make
it
small.
Here
are
a
few
simple
ways
to
help
you
feel
better
when
you
are
feeling
sad.
1.
Stand
up
straight
and
this
helps
your
energy
flow
(流动).
When
your
energy
is
flowing
freely,
you
can
flow
too.
2.
Smile!
It’s
easy
to
do
and
have
good
results.
This
way
can
not
only
leave
you
in
a
good
mood
but
also
bring
others
a
good
mood.
3.
Listen
to
music.
It
can
be
your
favourite
music.
Some
kinds
of
music
work
better
than
others,
so
try
and
find
out
what
kind
of
music
works
the
best
for
you.
4.
Take
some
“me”
time.
You
can
find
pleasure
in
reading
a
book,
watching
a
sunrise
or
having
a
hot
bath,
or
something
like
that.
5.
Exercise.
Even
something
as
simple
as
taking
a
walk
will
get
your
blood
flowing.
It
is
a
great
way
to
clear
your
mind
of
anything
that
makes
you
sad.
These
ways
will
cheer
you
up
when
you
are
down,
but
don’t
just
use
them
when
you
are
sad.
Try
and
practice
them
every
day
to
make
them
a
habit.
You
will
be
surprised
to
learn
that
these
simple
ways
will
keep
your
sadness
away.
But
if
you
are
in
a
deep
depression
(沮丧),
go
to
see
a
doctor.
Title:
How
to
beat
sadness
Opinions
●
It
is
OK
to
feel
down,
1
and
unhappy.●
It
is
possible
to
make
sadness
a
small
2
of
life.
Simple
3
to
cheer
you
up
●
Stand
up
straight
so
that
your
4
can
flow
freely.
●
5
at
others
because
it
can
bring
you
and
others
a
good
mood.
●
Listen
to
your
6
music
because
it
works
the
best.
●
7
pleasure
in
everyday
life,
such
as
watching
a
sunrise.
●
Take
a
walk
and
you
can
clear
your
8
of
sad
things.
Suggestions
●
Try
to
make
these
simple
ways
a
9
.●
Go
to
see
a
10
when
you
are
in
a
deep
depression.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
A
couple
of
years
ago,
I
went
to
Australia
for
a
meeting
with
my
friend,
Chris.
We
decided
to
drive
across
country
to
Brisbane
after
the
meeting
ended.
The
drive
was
going
to
take
four
days
and
most
of
it
was
across
the
desert,
1
The
first
day
was
a
lot
of
fun
as
we
were
excited
and
laughing
at
each
other’s
stupid
jokes.
By
the
third
day
of
driving
in
the
seemingly
endless
desert,
we
began
to
get
bored.
We
had
been
quiet
for
a
few
hours
when
in
the
distance
Chris
found
some
kangaroos.
We
were
both
excited
and
decided
to
get
a
closer
look.
2
We
got
closer
and
closer,
and
Chris
was
doing
110
kilometers
per
hour.
We
were
very
close
to
the
kangaroos—too
close—when
we
heard
a
loud
BANG!
Chris
stopped
the
car
and
we
got
out.
Behind
the
car
was
a
larger
kangaroo
lying
completely
still
on
the
ground.
3
He
took
off
his
sunglasses
and
put
them
on
the
kangaroo
and
did
the
same
with
his
jacket.
Then,
he
put
his
arm
around
the
kangaroo
and
told
me
to
take
a
photo
of
them
together.
4
While
I
was
focusing
the
camera,
I
saw
the
kangaroo
move.
It
suddenly
woke
up,
looked
at
Chris,
and
jumped
away
into
the
distance
before
we
could
do
anything.
I
started
laughing
but
Chris
looked
very
serious.
5
I
started
laughing
even
harder.
I
stopped
laughing,
however,
when
he
said
that
our
car
keys
were
also
in
the
jacket!
A.
Chris
speeded
up
to
catch
up
with
the
kangaroos.B.
He
said
his
wallet
and
passport
were
in
the
jacket.C.
In
order
to
get
there
in
three
days,
we
drove
very
fast.D.
so
we
had
to
take
food,
water,
and
extra
gas
with
us.E.
Chris
went
over
to
the
kangaroo
and
put
his
baseball
cap
on
its
head.F.
I
was
still
surprised,
but
I
took
out
my
camera.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Last
year
my
dad
got
a
new
job
in
a
small
town,
1
my
family
moved
there.
On
my
first
2
at
the
new
school
I
was
really
worried.
The
teachers
were
friendly,
but
the
3
was
the
other
students.
They
didn’t
seem
friendly.
I
knew
nobody
and
I
couldn’t
4
understand
what
they
said.
During
the
break
all
the
other
students
went
out.
I
didn’t
know
where
to
go,
so
I
5
in
the
classroom.
After
a
while,
a
6
came
back
in
and
came
up
to
me.
I
want
to
7
what
he
wanted
to
do.
He
took
8
out
of
his
bag
and
said
to
me,
“Would
you
like
something
to
9
”
It
was
an
apple.
Suddenly
I
felt
really
10
and
we
began
to
talk.
It
was
Tony
who
gave
me
the
apple
and
now
he
is
my
best
friend.
I
am
thankful
to
the
apple,
which
started
our
friendship.
(
)
1.
A.
or
B.
so
C.
but
(
)
2.
A.
day
B.
spring
C.
winter
(
)
3.
A.
project
B.
custom
C.
subject
(
)
4.
A.
hardly
B.
ever
C.
still
(
)
5.
A.
danced
B.
stayed
C.
sang
(
)
6.
A.
woman
B.
girl
C.
boy
(
)
7.
A.
see
B.
know
C.
think
(
)
8.
A.
something
B.
anything
C.
nothing
(
)
9.
A.
eat
B.
drink
C.
read
(
)
10.
A.
shy
B.
happy
C.
lonely
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
It
was
a
cold
day
in
December
in
New
York
City.
A
little
boy
about
10
years
old
was
standing
in
front
of
a
shoe
store
on
Broadway.
He
was
looking
through
the
windows,
barefooted
and
shivering
with
cold.
A
lady
walked
to
the
boy
and
said,
“My
little
boy,
what
are
you
looking
at ”
“I
am
asking
God
to
give
me
a
pair
of
shoes,”
the
boy
said.
The
lady
took
him
by
the
hand
and
went
into
the
store.
She
asked
the
clerk
to
get
a
pair
of
socks
for
the
boy.
She
then
asked
if
he
could
give
her
a
basin
of
hot
water
and
a
towel.
The
clerk
quickly
brought
the
things
to
her.
She
washed
the
boy’s
little
feet
and
dried
them
with
the
towel.
By
this
time,
the
clerk
had
returned
with
the
socks.
The
lady
put
on
the
socks
for
the
boy,
and
then
bought
him
a
pair
of
shoes.
She
patted
(轻拍)
him
on
the
head
and
said,
“My
little
boy,
do
you
feel
more
comfortable
now ”
As
she
turned
to
go,
the
boy
caught
her
by
the
hand
suddenly
and
looked
up
in
her
face.
With
tears
in
his
eyes,
he
answered
the
question
with
these
words,
“Are
you
God’s
wife ”
“No,
I’m
a
mother,”
said
the
woman.
(
)
1.
The
story
happened
in
______
on
a
cold
day
in
December.
A.
New
York
B.
London
C.
Moscow
(
)
2.
The
little
boy
standing
at
the
store
was
______.
A.
eight
years
old
B.
nine
years
old
C.
ten
years
old
(
)
3.
The
boy
was
looking
through
the
window
because
______.
A.
he
wanted
a
pair
of
shoes
B.
it
was
fun
to
do
C.
he
was
interested
in
the
window
(
)
4.
The
lady
bought
______
for
the
boy.
A.
a
towel
and
a
basin
B.
a
basin
and
shoes
C.
socks
and
shoes
(
)
5.
According
to
the
passage
the
lady
was
______.
A.
God’s
wife
B.
a
kind
woman
C.
the
boy’s
mother
B
Have
you
ever
had
problems
in
your
life
and
don’t
know
how
to
be
happy
If
so,
you
will
find
“Being
a
Happy
Teenager”
by
Australian
writer
Andrew
Matthews
useful.
In
his
book,
Matthews
tells
us
how
to
have
a
happy
life
and
answers
the
questions
of
teenagers.
There
are
many
subjects
such
as
parents
and
friends,
and
the
book
says
we
should
stop
being
angry
and
forgive.
The
book
tells
us
of
useful
skills
such
as
how
to
put
what
you
have
learned
into
pictures
of
your
mind
to
make
your
memory
better.
Many
teenagers
think
that
happiness
comes
from
a
good
exam
result
or
praise
(赞扬)
from
other
people.
But
you
can
still
be
happy
when
there
are
no
such
“good”
things.
Success
comes
from
a
good
attitude.
If
you
learn
from
problems,
you
will
have
success
in
the
future.
Some
school
boys
have
problems
such
as
being
too
tall
or
too
short.
But
Matthews
tells
us
happiness
comes
from
thinking
about
things
in
a
positive
(积极的)
way.
If
you
are
tall,
people
notice
you,
and
you
can
get
a
better
view
at
the
movie;
if
you
are
short,
your
clothes
and
shoes
take
less
room
in
your
bedroom!
This
is
Matthews’
most
important
lesson:
You
choose
to
be
happy!
(
)
6.
The
book
“Being
a
Happy
Teenager”
is
written
for
_______.
A.
students
who
are
not
successful
B.
students
who
have
problems
in
their
life
C.
students
who
have
problems
in
their
study
(
)
7.
The
book
“Being
a
Happy
Teenager”
talks
about
all
the
following
subjects
except
_____.
A.
that
happiness
comes
from
a
good
exam
result
B.
useful
skins
to
make
your
memory
better
C.
that
success
comes
from
a
good
attitude
(
)
8.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“attitude”
mean
in
Chinese
A.
姿势.
B.
记忆.
C.
态度.
(
)
9.
How
can
teenagers
be
happy
according
to
Matthews
A.
Get
a
good
exam
result.
B.
Get
praise
from
other
people.
C.
View
things
in
a
positive
way.
(
)
10.
What
does
the
title
of
this
passage
suggest
A.
If
you
want
to
be
happy,
you
should
be
a
successful
kid.
B.
If
you
want
to
be
successful,
you
should
be
a
happy
kid.
C.
If
you
are
a
happy
kid,
you
are
also
successful.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
What
will
you
do
if
you
don’t
have
any
pocket
money
Well,
it
is
a
good
way
1
some
from
your
parents.
In
Western
countries,
most
children
get
pocket
money
2
doing
some
housework
at
home.
They
usually
start
to
do
this
at
the
3
of
10.
School
students
have
to
do
the
homework
and
study
for
tests,
4
they
don’t
have
a
lot
of
free
time
on
weekdays.
They
often
do
some
chores
at
the
weekend.
Young
kids
can
only
do
5
chores.
So
they
don’t
get
much
money.
But
many
of
them
only
want
to
buy
candy.
And
candy
is
cheap!
They
do
the
dishes
after
dinner
and
6
the
pet
cat
or
dog.
7
they
water
the
flowers
and
other
plants
in
the
garden.
When
they
get
older,
kids
want
to
buy
8
things.
They
want
something
more
expensive
than
candy.
Then
they
have
to
work
harder!
They
often
wash
the
family
car,
cut
the
grass,
9
the
dog
or
cook
dinner
for
the
family.
Some
jobs
are
a
good
way
for
kids
to
learn
new
things.
For
example,
they
can
learn
to
use
a
lawn
mower
(割草机)
or
10
to
cook.
Of
course,
their
parents
help
them
at
first.
(
)
1.
A.
to
get
B.
getting
C.
gets
(
)
2.
A.
in
B.
by
C.
with
(
)
3.
A.
time
B.
year
C.
age
(
)
4.
A.
but
B.
so
C.
or
(
)
5.
A.
hard
B.
difficult
C.
easy
(
)
6.
A.
feed
B.
keep
C.
make
(
)
7.
A.
Some
times
B.
Sometimes
C.
Some
time
(
)
8.
A.
much
and
much
B.
many
and
many
C.
more
and
more
(
)
9.
A.
play
B.
walk
C.
take
(
)10.
A.
what
B.
how
C.
why
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Traveling
has
been
popular
with
people
for
a
long
time.
Many
of
today’s
travelers
are
trying
to
find
an
unusual
experience
or
adventure.
Hiking
may
be
a
good
choice.
Instead
of
spending
your
vacation
on
a
bus,
in
a
hotel
or
sitting
on
the
beach,
you
may
want
to
try
hiking.
Hiking
is
a
great
way
to
travel.
You
will
get
close
to
nature
and
take
exercise
at
the
same
time.
Hiking
is
easy
to
do
and
doesn’t
have
to
be
very
expensive.
You
can
hike
close
to
home
or
travel
to
other
places.
The
basic
equipment
you
need
for
hiking
is
simple:
good
shoes,
clothes
and
a
backpack.
You
can
hike
in
the
mountain,
in
a
forest
or
along
a
river.
You
can
also
go
for
a
hike
in
the
city.
Hiking
is
fun
and
exciting,
but
you
shouldn’t
forget
safety.
Here
are
some
basic
tips
for
successful
hiking:
＊Don’t
hike
alone.
＊Bring
water,
a
good
map
and
a
cellphone.
＊Wear
a
hat
to
protect
yourself
from
the
sun.
(
)
1.
Hiking
is
a
good
way
to
get
close
to
nature.
(
)
2.
Good
shoes,
clothes
and
a
backpack
are
the
basic
equipment
for
hiking.
(
)
3.
People
can
only
hike
in
the
mountain,
in
a
forest
or
along
a
river.
(
)
4.
Hiking
is
always
fun,
exciting
and
safe.
(
)
5.
You’d
better
go
hiking
with
others.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
(Tony
is
talking
to
his
net
friend
Mark
on
QQ.
)
Tony:
Hello,
Mark.
1
are
you
today
Mark:
Fine,
thanks.
I’ve
just
2
my
homework.
Tony:
How
many
classes
did
you
have
this
morning
Mark:
3
.
Math,
English,
Music
and
P.E..
Tony:
Do
you
like
the
P.
E.
class
Mark:
Of
4
.
I
like
playing
basketball
very
much.
My
favorite
basketball
5
is
Yao
Ming.
Tony:
Did
you
have
any
classes
this
afternoon
Mark:
Yes,
we
6
two.
After
that
I
played
basketball
with
my
classmates.
Tony:
Really
I
played
basketball,
7
.
We
had
a
game
with
Class
2
this
afternoon.
Mark:
8
you
win
the
game
Tony:
No,
we
didn’t.
I
hate
to
lose.
I’m
not
9
at
basketball,
you
know.
Mark:
Don’t
be
sad.
You
should
always
practice
it.
Tony:
You
10
right.
Thank
you.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
happy
close
angry
parent
listen
make
if
long
but
important
Are
you
the
only
child
in
the
family
If
so,
you
are
the
most
1
in
your
family.
__2__
are
the
closest
people
to
you
in
the
world.
But
a
lot
of
middle
school
students
have
a
problem.
They
feel
they’re
not
as
3
to
their
parents
as
before.
They
even
think
their
parents
are
unfair
to
them.
Some
students
complain
that
their
parents
say
a
lot
to
them,
but
never
4
to
them.
Some
of
them
even
say
it
5
.
“My
parents
don’t
allow
me
to
play
computer
games,
6
other
classmates
are
doing
that.”
Others
say,
when
they’re
7
phone
calls
to
friends,
their
parents
like
to
ask
if
they’re
speaking
to
a
boy
or
a
girl.
These
make
them
very
8
.
Some
students
even
decide
to
leave
home.
But
they
don’t
know
running
away
may
bring
them
some
more
problems.
Show
your
parents
you’re
growing
up.
Then
they’ll
feel
you’re
no
9
a
small
child.
10
you
follow
the
advice,
you’ll
have
a
happy
life
and
never
think
of
running
away.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Almost
every
child
in
cities
has
the
chance
to
go
to
school,
but
not
all
children
in
the
countryside
are
so
lucky.
There
is
a
girl
called
Xiao
Juan.
She
is
ten
years
old
and
lives
in
a
small
village.
When
she
was
seven,
she
wanted
to
go
to
school.
But
she
could
not,
because
her
family
was
too
poor
to
afford
the
school
fees
(学费)
for
her,
so
her
parents
had
to
keep
her
at
home.
Instead
of
studying,
Xiao
Juan
looked
after
her
brother
and
worked
in
the
fields
every
day.
Then
Hope
Project
heard
about
Xiao
Juan.
It
agreed
to
help
Xiao
Juan
to
go
to
school.
Her
wish
of
study
came
true,
and
now
she
is
studying
in
a
school.
Unluckily,
there
are
many
thousands
of
children
who
can
not
go
to
school.
You
can
join
in
Hope
Project
and
help
these
children.
You
know
all
the
good
work
needs
money.
Hope
Project
needs
your
help.
If
you
give
Hope
Project
￥300
each
year,
it
can
pay
for
one
child
to
go
to
school
for
a
whole
year.
With
more
money,
Hope
Project
can
build
new
schools,
buy
good
desks,
chairs,
blackboards
and
books.
Let’s
help
the
children
together
and
give
them
a
chance
to
have
a
good
start
in
life.
Information
Card
The
girl’s
name
1
.
Her
age
2
.
The
place
where
she
lives
In
a
3
.
The
reason
she
couldn’t
go
to
school
Her
parents
couldn’t
afford
4
.
Who
helped
the
girl
to
go
to
school
5
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
An
Internet
friend
is
someone
who
you
talk
to
online
and
probably
have
never
met.
You
may
have
first
talked
to
this
person
in
a
chat
room
and
discovered
that
you
had
a
lot
in
common.
1
Internet
friends
often
live
in
another
city,
or
even
another
country!
Having
internet
friends
is
a
unique
experience
and
gives
us
a
chance
to
learn
about
other
people.
Even
though
internet
friends
can
be
a
lot
of
fun,
it
is
important
to
remember
that
we
need
to
be
cautious.
2
we
have
no
way
of
knowing
if
they
are
telling
the
truth.
It
is
important
not
to
give
too
much
personal
information
because
it
may
be
dangerous.
Always
think
twice
before
giving
an
internet
friend
your
telephone
number
or
home
address.
3
but
it
is
important
to
remember
to
keep
the
relationship
light-hearted.
There
may
be
many
people
that
you
talk
to
online,
but
they
don’t
know
the
real
you.
4
A
good
friend
will
know
all
about
you
and
be
there
when
you
need
them.
You
can
spend
time
with
them
and
share
your
feelings.
5
but
don’t
forget
about
your
other
true
friends.
Remember
to
balance
your
time
among
friends
and
you
should
have
a
good
time!
A.
Having
internet
friends
can
be
very
exciting,B.
You
probably
exchange
messages
with
this
person
whenever
you
are
online.C.
An
internet
friend
can
never
replace
your
true
friends.D.
If
you
have
internet
friends,
enjoy
talking
with
them
online.E.
Since
we
have
probably
never
met
the
person
we
are
talking
to,F.
An
internet
friend
is
the
best
friend
of
us,
so
we
should
believe
them.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
I
have
a
friend,
and
she
used
to
smoke
cigarettes
(香烟).
She
1
smoking
at
the
age
of
11.
She
mixed
with
the
wrong
crowd
and
she
thought
they
were
2
because
they
smoked,
and
in
order
to
be
cool
and
to
be
friends
with
them,
she
had
to
smoke
too.
Soon
after,
she
3
me
in
Chicago.
We
became
4
.
One
day
on
our
way
home,
she
started
5
.
I
asked
her
why
and
she
told
me
6
she
first
started.
I
told
her
she
should
bring
her
grades
up,
not
just
to
be
cool
but
to
make
her
parents
7
,
to
make
herself
cleverer,
to
make
herself
feel
better
and
most
of
all,
she
could
get
a
good
8
.
I
stayed
with
her
every
second,
9
away
her
cigarettes
every
time
she
went
for
one.
Soon,
she
stopped
smoking.
One
day
I
happened
to
see
her
smoking
again.
I
told
her
she
needed
to
choose
me
or
10
.
We
didn’t
talk
for
two
days.
Then
she
finally
called
and
said
she’d
never
smoke
again.
Now,
it’s
only
been
a
few
months,
but
she
is
doing
better
and
doesn’t
smoke.
(
)
1.
A.
began
B.
stopped
C.
liked
(
)
2.
A.
strong
B.
cool
C.
friendly
(
)
3.
A.
followed
B.
remembered
C.
moved
near
(
)
4.
A.
classmates
B.
workmates
C.
friends
(
)
5.
A.
smoking
B.
drinking
C.
singing
(
)
6.
A.
when
B.
how
C.
where
(
)
7.
A.
worried
B.
happier
C.
better
(
)
8.
A.
education
B.
friend
C.
job
(
)
9.
A.
blowing
B.
throwing
C.
giving
(
)
10.
A.
her
crowd
B.
her
parents
C.
cigarettes
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
When
you
are
feeling
unhappy
or
forget
how
great
you
are,
these
are
six
ways
to
make
you
feel
good
about
yourself.
●
Look
in
the
mirror
and
say
to
yourself,
“I
am
a
special
person
and
there’s
no
one
in
the
world
like
me.
I
can
do
anything.”
It
may
not
sound
so
good,
but
it
really
works!
●
Do
something
nice
for
someone.
Helping
others
always
makes
you
feel
good.
●
Smile!
Be
friendly
to
people
you
meet.
Look
for
the
good
things
in
your
friends
and
family.
●
Learn
something
new!
Have
you
always
wanted
to
design
your
own
room
or
learn
how
to
swim
Go
for
it!
New
challengers
are
fun
and
give
you
a
sense
of
accomplishment
when
you
have
finished.
●
Start
to
write
a
dairy.
Turn
off
the
TV
and
let
your
imagination
fly!
Write
down
your
thought,
dreams
or
anything
you
want!
Writing
always
helps
to
express
your
feelings.
●
Stay
with
your
family.
We
all
need
our
family
time.
Talk
with
your
Mom
or
Dad
or
maybe
even
your
cousin.
(
)
1.
The
passage
may
be
from
_______.
A.
a
science
book
B.
a
magazine
C.
a
story
book
(
)
2.
According
to
this
passage,
when
you
are
helping
others,
you
will
_______.
A.
be
special
B.
be
sure
C.
feel
nice
(
)
3.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“a
sense
of
accomplishment”
mean
in
Chinese
A.
成就感.
B.
忧伤感.
C.
挫折感.
(
)
4.
Which
of
the
following
should
you
say
“No”
to
when
you
are
unhappy
A.
You
should
always
look
for
the
good
things
of
others.
B.
Stay
alone
at
home
as
much
as
possible.
C.
Learn
something
new
and
go
for
it!
(
)
5.
What
is
the
best
title
for
the
passage
A.
Do
Your
Best
B.
It’s
Never
Too
Late
to
Learn
C.
Six
Ways
to
Feel
Good
about
Yourself
B
When
I
was
13
years
old,
a
boy
gave
me
an
important
gift.
It
was
a
smile.
It
was
the
early
autumn
of
my
first
year
at
a
junior
high
school,
and
my
old
school
was
far
away.
As
a
result,
no
one
knew
who
I
was.
I
was
very
lonely,
and
afraid
to
make
friends
with
anyone.
Every
time
I
heard
the
other
students
talking
and
laughing,
I
felt
my
heart
break.
I
couldn’t
talk
to
anyone
about
my
problem,
and
I
didn’t
want
my
parents
to
worry
about
me.
Then
one
day,
my
classmate
talked
happily
with
their
friends,
but
I
sat
at
my
desk
unhappily
as
usual.
At
that
moment,
a
boy
entered
the
classroom.
I
didn’t
know
who
he
was.
He
passed
me
and
turned
back.
He
looked
at
me
and
without
a
word,
smiled.
Suddenly,
I
felt
the
touch
of
something
bright
and
friendly.
It
made
me
feel
happy,
lively
and
warm.
That
smile
changed
my
life.
I
started
to
talk
with
the
other
students
and
made
friends.
Day
by
day,
I
became
closer
to
everyone
in
my
class.
The
boy
with
the
lucky
smile
has
become
my
best
friend
now.
One
day,
I
asked
him
why
he
smiled,
but
he
couldn’t
remember
smiling
at
me!
It
doesn’t
matter
because
all
the
dark
days
have
gone.
Now
I
believe
that
the
world
is
what
you
think
it
is.
If
you
think
you
are
lonely,
you
might
always
be
alone.
So
smile
at
the
world
and
it
will
smile
back.
(
)
6.
Why
was
the
smile
an
important
gift
A.
Because
the
writer’s
old
school
was
far
away.
B.
Because
the
smile
didn’t
mean
anything
to
the
boy.
C.
Because
it
made
the
writer
feel
happy,
lively
and
warm.
(
)
7.
The
writer
couldn’t
talk
to
anyone
in
her
new
school
about
her
problem
because
______.
A.
she
was
always
unhappy
B.
she
didn’t
have
any
friends
here
C.
she
was
in
the
first
year
at
a
junior
high
school
(
)
8.
How
did
the
smiling
change
her
life
A.
She
started
to
make
friends.
B.
She
became
best
friends
with
the
boy.
C.
Her
parents
didn’t
worry
about
her
any
more.
(
)
9.
Where
does
she
now
think
her
feeling
of
unhappiness
came
from
A.
From
her
old
school.

B.
From
her
parents.
C.
From
herself.
(
)
10.
Which
of
the
following
is
TRUE
from
the
passage
A.
The
boy
still
remembered
why
he
smiled
at
her.
B.
Nobody
knew
me
at
the
beginning
of
my
first
year
at
a
junior
high
school.
C.
I
felt
very
happy
when
I
heard
the
other
students
talking
and
laughing.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Are
you
nervous
when
you
stand
in
front
of
the
public
Are
you
afraid
to
make
a
speech
Li
Jun,
a
middle
school
boy,
felt
shy
when
he
was
making
a
speech
the
other
day.
Li
had
thought
it
be
quite
easy
to
speak
in
front
of
1
classmates.
“I
was
wrong.
It
was
very
different
and
much
2
than
talking
to
my
classmates
during
playtime,”
Li
said.
“I
tried,
but
it
was
really
difficult
to
speak.
I
felt
like
a
mute
(哑巴)
and
wanted
to
leave
the
classroom
3
.”
Li
is
not
alone.
Many
middle
school
students
now
have
the
same
4
:
they
can
talk
about
their
ideas
freely
5
their
best
friends
after
class,
but
can’t
speak
in
public.
According
to
Zhou
Hong,
a
teacher
from
a
university,
the
main
reason
is
that
schools
in
China
pay
more
attention
to
writing
instead
of
6
.
Zhou
hopes
schools
can
give
students
more
chances
to
open
their
7
,
such
as
speech
competitions,
English
corners
and
class
discussions.
Students
can
join
in
any
one
they
want
to.
8
he
also
gives
some
advice
to
students.
“During
your
free
time
you
should
9
more.
When
you’re
speaking
in
public,
take
it
easy.
Just
imagine
you’re
talking
to
nobody
and
speak
up
your
ideas
clearly,”
Zhou
said.
“That
10
a
fine
public
speech
and
you’ll
feel
confident.”
(
)
1.
A.
her
B.
my
C.
his
(
)
2.
A.
harder
B.
easier
C.
better
(
)
3.
A.
slowly
B.
quickly
C.
sadly
(
)
4.
A.
answer
B.
subject
C.
problem
(
)
5.
A.
except
B.
beside
C.
with
(
)
6.
A.
listening
B.
speaking
C.
reading
(
)
7.
A.
mouths
B.
eyes
C.
minds
(
)
8.
A.
But
B.
So
C.
And
(
)
9.
A.
play
B.
practice
C.
write
(
)
10.
A.
reports
B.
keeps
C.
makes
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
A
little
girl
thought
she
was
not
as
beautiful
as
other
girls,
and
nobody
liked
her.
So
she
was
always
unhappy
and
didn’t
like
to
talk
to
others.
However,
one
day,
her
mother
gave
her
a
beautiful
hair
clip.
When
she
wore
it,
she
looked
much
more
beautiful
than
before.
She
decided
to
wear
it
to
school.
On
her
way
to
school
she
found
that
everyone
who
saw
her
smiled
at
her.
Most
of
her
schoolmates
said
“hello”
to
her,
but
this
never
happened
before.
She
thought
that
the
beautiful
hair
clip
had
brought
her
them
all.
She
was
so
happy
about
all
of
the
wonderful
things.
Although
she
didn’t
tell
her
classmates
about
her
beautiful
hair
clip,
they
all
wanted
to
know
what
had
happened
to
her.
When
she
went
back
home
after
school,
her
mother
asked
her,
“Did
you
know
you
dropped
your
hair
clip
I
found
it
by
the
door
this
morning.”
She
understood
that
she
hadn’t
worn
the
hair
clip
to
school
at
all.
It
is
not
important
that
we
wear
or
how
we
look.
The
most
important
is
how
we
think
about
ourselves.
(
)
1.
The
little
girl
was
not
beautiful
because
she
had
no
money
to
buy
a
hair
clip.
(
)
2.
Her
mother
didn’t
like
the
little
girl,
either.
(
)
3.
Most
of
the
schoolmates
liked
her
beautiful
hair
clip
very
much
on
that
day.
(
)
4.
Her
mother
found
the
clip
by
the
door
after
the
girl
went
to
school.
(
)
5.
It
is
not
important
what
we
wear
or
how
we
look.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
A:
Ann,
is
1
you
B:
Yes.
You’re
Cindy,
2
you
A:
Yes,
that’s
right.
I
haven’t
seen
you
3
a
long
time.
You’ve
4
a
lot.
B:
5

How
A:
You
used
to
be
a
little
6
,
now
you’re
thin.
B:
Yes,
I
am.
A:
You
used
to
have
7
hair.
Now
you
have
curly
hair.
B:
Yes,
you’re
right.
A:
And
you
used
to
8
glasses.
B:
Yes,
I
still
9
.
But
today
I
have
contact
lenses.
A:
You
used
to
play
the
piano,
didn’t
you
B:
Yes,
I
did.
10
now
I’m
more
interested
in
the
violin.
A:
Wow!
People
sure
change.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
example
such
say
make
shy
place
need
brother
parent
feel
do
mean
How
to
Talk
About
Your
Feelings
Once
you
know
who
you
can
talk
with,
you’ll
want
to
pick
a
time
and
1
to
talk.
Does
it
need
to
be
private
(私下的),
or
can
you
talk
with
your
2
and
sister
in
the
room
If
you
think
you’ll
have
trouble
3
what’s
on
your
mind,
write
it
down
on
a
piece
of
paper.
If
the
person
doesn’t
understand
what
you
4
right
away,
try
explaining
it
in
a
different
way
or
give
a
(n)
5
of
what’s
about
you.
Is
there
something
you
think
could
be
done
6
things
better
If
so,
say
it.
Some
kids
—
just
like
some
adults
—
are
more
private
than
others.
That
means
some
people
will
feel
7
about
sharing
their
feelings.
A
kid
doesn’t
have
to
share
every
8
he
or
she
has,
but
it
is
important
to
share
feelings
when
a
kid
9
help.
You
don’t
have
to
solve
every
problem
on
your
own.
Sometimes
you
need
help.
And
if
you
10
,
talking
about
your
feelings
can
be
the
first
step
toward
getting
it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
If
you
think
you
are
too
shy
and
want
to
be
a
little
bit
braver,
just
try
the
following
things:
Be
open
to
others.
Tell
people
you
are
shy.
There
is
no
need
to
hide
it.
When
they
get
to
know
you
are
a
shy
kid,
they
will
understand
you
better.
This
also
helps
you
feel
more
comfortable
in
talks.
Try
to
smile
more.
When
you
smile,
people
think
you
are
friendly
and
easy
to
talk
with.
Remember
that
other
people
have
feelings,
too;
and
most
people
will
stay
away
from
an
angry-looking
face.
Learn
to
be
a
good
talker.
If
you
find
it
hard
to
start
a
conversation,
say
something
nice
about
people
around
you.
Think
about
how
great
you
feel
when
someone
says
something
nice
to
you.
Doesn’t
it
make
you
want
to
keep
talking
to
that
person
Get
your
attention
elsewhere.
Think
more
about
ways
to
enjoy
parties
or
games.
Don’t
waste
time
worrying
about
your
look
or
whether
people
like
you
or
not.
You
will
become
relaxed
and
find
it’s
not
so
hard
to
talk
with
others.
Take
one
small
step
at
a
time.
Each
time
when
you
say
“Hi!”
or
smile
at
someone,
say
to
yourself
“You
can
make
it.”
Keep
trying
and
one
day
you’ll
never
feel
shy
when
you
talk
to
others.
Title:
Advice
on
1
to
be
a
little
braver
Advice
Reasons
Don’t
hide
the
fact.
If
you
tell
people
you
are
shy,
they
will
understand
you
better.
Smile
more.
People
don’t
2
the
one
with
an
angry-looking
face.
Start
a
conversation
with
3
words.
People
will
feel
great
and
want
to
talk
to
you.
Pay
more
attention
to
ways
to
enjoy
4
or
games.
You
will
become
relaxed.
Encourage
yourself
to
say
“Hi!”
or
smile
at
someone.
Keep
doing
this
and
you’ll
be
braver
to
talk
to
others
5
the
future.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
What
If
You
Were
Angry
Everyone
feels
angry
with
someone
else
now
and
then.
Being
angry
is
OK
—
and
nothing
to
apologize
for
—
but
knowing
1
.
When
little
kids
are
angry,
they
might
hit
or
kick
or
break
out.
They
don’t
have
much
self-control
and
2
because
they’re
upset.
But
as
kids
get
bigger
and
can
use
words,
they
know
better
than
to
hit
or
kick
or
break
out
when
they’re
angry.
3
.
Of
course,
the
words
they
say
when
they’re
angry
might
be
stronger
or
louder
than
usual
—
but
the
words
don’t
have
to
be
mean.
4
.
You
can
be
honest
about
how
you
feel
without
being
unkind.
But
sometimes
anger
takes
over
and
kids
might
lose
self-control.
They
might
say
mean
things,
lose
their
cool,
and
hit
or
push
someone.
Afterward,
5
,
it
is
not
OK
to
behave
that
way.
That’s
when
an
apology
is
needed
of
course.
A.
They
learn
to
express
their
feelings
with
wordsB.
most
kids
realize
that
even
if
they
were
right
to
be
angryC.
how
to
tell
someone
what
made
you
angry
is
importantD.
they
might
not
have
learned
yet
that
it’s
wrong
to
hit
someoneE.
You
can
tell
someone
you’re
upset
and
why
without
putting
that
person
downF.
Tell
your
mother
what
you
think
about
it
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
What’s
your
idea
about
success
Some
people
say
that
beginners
have
all
the
luck,
while
others
believe
that
success
1
only
with
practice.
In
fact,
I
feel
both
of
these
statements
(陈述)
are
not
true
all
the
time.
Each
is
true
in
some
ways
2
not
in
others.
For
example,
I
went
to
a
drawing
competition
many
years
ago
and
3
surprisingly.
As
a
prize,
I
got
a
film
ticket
to
see
“Titanic”.
I
was
really
4
because
it
was
the
first
time
I
had
taken
part
in
any
competition.
Thinking
that
I
might
be
lucky
again,
I
5
joining
in
other
art
competitions.
But
the
result
was
that
I
6
won
again.
I
accepted
the
fact
that
the
other
people
had
a
7
artistic
ability
than
I
did.
Art
was
not
something
I
was
especially
interested
in
and
I
had
never
practiced
the
different
art
skills.
So,
the
8
I
produced
were
not
of
a
very
high
standard.
These
experiences
taught
me
a
lot.
Though
I
might
have
been
lucky
9
,
I
also
need
to
put
in
hard
work.
As
we
know,
10
makes
perfect.
So
I
believe
success
builds
on
less
luck
and
chance.
(
)
1.
A.
moves
B.
comes
C.
returns
(
)
2.
A.
or
B.
and
C.
but
(
)
3.
A.
won
B.
began
C.
failed
(
)
4.
A.
sorry
B.
active
C.
lucky
(
)
5.
A.
tried
B.
forgot
C.
stopped
(
)
6.
A.
often
B.
ever
C.
never
(
)
7.
A.
greater
B.
more
natural
C.
lower
(
)
8.
A.
results
B.
drawings
C.
prizes
(
)
9.
A.
at
last
B.
at
most
C.
at
first
(
)
10.
A.
chance
B.
practice
C.
difference
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Everyone
knows
that
there’s
not
enough
land
in
Hong
Kong.
If
you
go
there
by
air,
you
will
land
at
Kai
Tak
Airport.
It
was
built
out
into
the
sea.
It
is
in
the
part
of
Hong
Kong
called
Kowloon.
Kowloon
is
one
of
the
two
big
islands
in
Hong
Kong.
The
other
island
is
Hong
Kong
itself.
You
can
get
there
by
ship
or
through
a
tunnel
(隧道)
under
the
sea.
The
population
of
Hong
Kong
is
more
than
six
million.
Chinese
and
English
are
spoken
by
many
people
there.
Clothes,
computers,
radios,
televisions
are
made
in
Hong
Kong.
It
is
a
shopping
center.
You
can
buy
all
kinds
of
things
there.
Hong
Kong
is
also
a
beautiful
city.
It’s
a
good
place
for
traveling.
People
from
all
over
the
world
visit
Hong
Kong
every
year.
You
can
watch
dog-racing
and
motor-racing
there.
When
you
are
hot
and
tired,
you
may
rest
in
the
small
cool
gardens.
There
are
also
a
lot
of
tall
buildings
with
comfortable
rooms
to
live
in.
If
you
enjoy
eating
out,
you
can
easily
find
a
good
place
for
delicious
food.
Foods
of
different
flavors
(风味)
are
served
in
Hong
Kong.
(
)
1.
Where
was
Kai
Tak
Airport
built
A.
It
was
built
out
into
the
sea.
B.
It
was
built
out
into
the
lake.
C.
It
was
built
out
into
the
river.
(
)
2.
What’s
the
population
of
Hong
Kong
A.
Nearly
6
million.
B.
Less
than
6
million.
C.
Over
6
million.
(
)
3.
How
many
kinds
of
products
(产品)
of
Hong
Kong
are
mentioned
in
this
passage
A.
7.
B.6.
C.5.
(
)
4.
Which
of
the
following
sentences
is
NOT
true
according
to
the
passage
A.
Kai
Tak
Airport
is
in
Kowloon.
B.
There’s
a
lot
of
land
in
Hong
Kong.
C.
Many
people
in
Hong
Kong
speak
Chinese
and
English.
(
)
5.
According
to
the
passage,
we
know
that
_______.
A.
Hong
Kong
is
a
big
city
with
a
large
population
B.
there
are
almost
no
factories
in
Hong
Kong
C.
few
people
visit
Hong
Kong
ever
year
B
Years
ago
I
worked
at
a
factory
in
a
small
county.
Every
day
I
got
up
very
early
and
often
did
much
extra
work
at
night.
I
was
so
tired
and
exhausted.
My
whole
life
was
hopeless.
Then
one
day
I
read
the
following
article
from
a
magazine:
“A
woman
went
to
live
with
her
husband
in
camp
on
the
Mojave
Desert
(沙漠)
during
the
war.
She
simply
hated
the
place:
the
heat
was
almost
unbearable,
125
degrees
in
the
shade,
the
wind
blew
incessantly,
and
there
was
sand-sand
everywhere.
Finally,
in
desperation
(不顾一切地)
she
wrote
her
parents
in
Ohio
that
she
couldn’t
stand
it
another
minute
and
was
coming
home.
Quickly
came
the
reply
by
airmail
from
her
father—just
two
lines:
‘Two
men
looked
out
from
prison
bars.
One
saw
the
mud,
the
other
saw
stars.’
The
daughter
did
some
real
thinking,
not
only
with
the
intellect
(思维)
but
also
with
her
heart.
She
decided
to
stick
to
her
post.
She
made
friends
with
the
natives,
learned
to
love
the
country,
and
eventually
wrote
a
book
about
it.
The
desert
hadn’t
changed,
but
her
attitude
had.
Because
she
listened
with
her
heart
to
the
words
her
father
sent,
a
whole
new
world
opened
up
to
her.
A
change
of
attitude
could
change
everything.”
After
reading
the
article,
I
was
deep
in
thought
(陷入沉思)...
(
)
6.
The
underlined
word
“unbearable”
means
______
in
Chinese.
A.
难以想象的
B.
难以克服的
C.
难以忍受的
(
)
7.
After
she
received
her
father’s
reply,
the
woman
_______.
A.
went
back
home
B.
was
coming
home
C.
decided
to
stay
there
(
)
8.
From
her
father’s
reply,
we
can
infer
(推断)
that
_______.
A.
her
parents
wanted
her
to
stay
there
with
her
husband
B.
one
man
was
in
prison,
the
other
was
out
of
prison
C.
two
men
were
out
of
prison
(
)
9.
Which
of
the
following
is
wrong
according
to
the
passage
A.
A
woman
went
to
live
with
her
husband
in
a
big
city.
B.
The
woman
finally
made
friends
with
the
natives.
C.
She
wrote
her
parents
that
she
was
coming.
(
)
10.
The
main
idea
of
this
passage
is
that
_______.
A.
a
woman
went
to
live
with
her
husband
in
camp
B.
a
change
of
attitude
could
change
everything
C.
the
daughter’s
parents
wanted
her
to
stay
with
her
husband
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Many
parents
want
their
children
to
be
famous
one
day.
But
do
children
have
the
same
1

A
new
2
—Hi,
Ke’ai
is
on
at
Beijing
Children’s
Art
Theatre.
It
tells
the
story
of
a
boy
called
Ke’ai.
His
parents
would
like
him
to
become
a
painter
or
a
3
one
day.
They
teach
him
to
4
and
to
play
the
violin,
but
Ke’ai
doesn’t
enjoy
these
activities.
Then
one
day
Ke’ai’s
parents
see
Liu
Xiang
win
a
gold
5
at
the
Athens
Olympic
Games,
and
they
want
him
to
be
a
sportsman.
“
6
do
they
want
me
to
be
someone
else ”
Ke’ai
asks
and
says,
“I
only
want
to
be
7
.”
The
play
shows
us
that
it
is
good
for
parents
to
learn
to
8
their
children.
It
helps
parents
to
think
about
what
kids
want
to
do.
Young
audiences
(观众)
enjoy
the
story,
and
also
the
9
in
the
play.
There
are
two
songs
in
the
play.
One
of
them,
“Ke’ai’s
Song”
is
very
10
to
learn,
so
the
audiences
can
sing
the
song
on
their
way
home
after
the
play!
(
)
1.
A.
jobs
B.
dreams
C.
habits
(
)
2.
A.
song
B.
film
C.
play
(
)
3.
A.
writer
B.
teacher
C.
musician
(
)
4.
A.
paint
B.
write
C.
run
(
)
5.
A.
match
B.
ring
C.
medal
(
)
6.
A.
How
B.
Why
C.
When
(
)
7.
A.
myself
B.
different
C.
alone
(
)
8.
A.
encourage
B.
understand
C.
criticize
(
)
9.
A.
light
B.
skill
C.
music
(
)
10.
A.
easy
B.
difficult
C.
important
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Healthy
Eating
Healthy
eating
is
important
to
us.
What
and
how
should
we
eat
to
be
healthy
First,
we
must
have
enough
food,
never
too
much
or
too
little.
The
food
must
be
clean
and
we
should
cook
it
properly.
Second,
it’s
very
important
for
us
to
keep
a
balanced
diet.
Different
kinds
of
foods
are
necessary,
such
as
rice,
bread,
meat,
fish,
eggs,
milk
and
vegetables.
Rice
and
bread
give
us
energy.
Meat,
fish,
eggs
and
milk
help
our
bones
grow.
Fruit
and
vegetables
make
us
healthy.
Third,
we
should
eat
regularly.
It’s
said
that
half
of
the
students
don’t
have
a
regular
breakfast
or
don’t
eat
anything
at
all
in
the
morning.
It
is
bad
for
their
health.
In
fact,
a
good
breakfast
keeps
us
strong.
In
short,
we
should
not
only
eat
enough
food,
healthy
food
but
also
eat
regularly.
(
)
1.
We
eat
food
freely.
(
)
2.
We
should
eat
different
kinds
of
healthy
foods.
(
)
3.
Vegetables
are
the
most
important
food
for
our
health.
(
)
4.
The
more
regularly,
the
healthier
we
are.
(
)
5.
All
the
students
don’t
have
a
regular
breakfast.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
W:
Excuse
me,
sir.
M:
Yes,
what
can
I
1
for
you,
madam
W:
It’s
12
o’clock.
I
have
been
here
2
an
hour
to
meet
my
father.
But
I
saw
all
the
passagers
come
out
except
3
.
M:
Are
you
sure
of
the
4
his
flight
arrives
W:
Yes,
I
think
so.
He
told
me
he
would
reach
the
airport
5
about
1:00
this
afternoon.
M:
That’s
true.
Flight
BA506
has
just
6
.
W:
What
BA506
Well,
I
don’t
think
it’s
7
flight
number.
M:
Do
you
8
his
flight
number
W:
It’s
VA407.
I
think
…
Oh,
a
minute,
please.
Here.
I
wrote
9
on
my
notebook.
Sorry,
it’s
VA408.
M:
VA408
I
see,
madam,
the
flight
was
to
arrive
at
1:00,
but
it
will
be
two
hours
and
twenty
minutes
late
because
of
the
bad
weather
in
New
York.
W:
OK.
Then
I
will
10
to
wait
longer.
Thank
you
very
much,
sir.
M:
Good
luck!
Madam.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
one
money
food
your
trip
give
thousand
foot
through
cost
agree
road
Don’t
Change
the
World
Once
upon
a
time,
there
was
a
king
who
ruled
a
rich
country.
One
day,
he
went
for
a
1
to
some
distant
(遥远的)
areas
of
his
country.
When
he
was
back
to
his
palace,
he
complained
that
his
feet
were
very
painful,
because
it
was
the
2
time
that
he
went
for
such
a
long
trip,
and
the
road
that
he
went
3
was
very
rough
and
stony.
He
then
ordered
his
people
to
cover
every
4
of
the
country
with
leather.
Of
course,
this
would
need
5
of
cows’
skin,
and
6
a
huge
amount
of
money.
Then
one
of
his
wise
servants
dared
himself
to
tell
the
king,
“Why
do
you
have
to
spend
that
unnecessary
amount
of
7

Why
don’t
you
just
cut
a
little
piece
of
leather
to
cover
your
8
”
The
king
was
surprised,
but
he
later
9
to
his
suggestion,
to
make
a
“shoe”
for
himself.
In
fact,
there
is
a
valuable
lesson
of
life
in
this
story:
to
make
this
world
a
happy
place
to
live,
you’d
better
change
10
—your
heart;
and
not
the
world.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
What
makes
a
successful
speech
First,
you
should
have
a
good
speech
script
(稿子)
so
that
your
ideas
and
language
can
attract
people’s
attention.
And
some
skills
are
necessary,
too.
Here
are
some
suggestions
on
giving
great
speeches:
◇Beat
nerves
Relax
yourself
before
and
when
making
a
speech.
Practice
your
opening
sentence
three
or
four
times.
This
will
help
make
a
sure
start
and
a
successful
speech.
When
you
stand
on
the
stage,
think
of
the
audience
(观众)
as
your
family
members
and
friends.
◇Keep
it
natural
Natural
body
languages
will
help
your
speech:
smile,
stand
straight
and
look
at
the
audience.
Do
not
drop
your
head
or
play
with
a
pen.
Also,
dressing
yourself
nicely
will
help
the
audience
feel
respected.
◇Pace
and
pause
(节奏和停顿)
Pace
and
pause
add
color
to
your
speech.
Speak
fast
enough
to
keep
people
excited
and
slowly
enough
for
people
to
fully
understand
you.
After
an
important
point,
pause
for
a
moment.
It’ll
change
the
atmosphere
(气氛)
in
the
audience.
Tips
on
giving
speeches
Main
tips
Things
to
do
Advantages
Speech
script
Have
good
1
.
People’s
attention
is
attracted.
Suggested
2
A:
Practice
opening
sentence
threeor
four
times.
B:
Think
of
the
audience
as
your
family
members
and
friends.
A:
This
can
give
you
a
sure
start.B:
This
can
help
3
.
A:
Smile,
stand
straight
and
look
at
the
audience.B:
Dress
yourself
formally.
A:
These
4
will
help
your
speech.B:
The
audience
will
feel
respected.
A:
Speak
fast
enough
sometimes
and
slowly
enough
other
times.B:
Pause
after
an
important
point.
A:
People
are
kept
5
and
can
5
you.B:
The
atmosphere
in
the
audience
will
be
changed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、恢复原文。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
Anger
is
a
kind
of
feeling.
1
When
your
teacher
gives
you
too
much
homework,
when
your
team
loses
an
important
game,
when
a
friend
borrows
your
favorite
thing
and
then
breaks
it,
you
may
get
angry.
2
For
example,
you
breathe
faster,
your
face
turns
red,
and
you
may
want
to
break
something
or
hit
someone,
but
sometimes
you
hide
your
anger.
For
example,
you
may
hide
it
in
your
heart.
The
problem
is
that
if
you
do
this,
you
may
get
a
headache
or
your
stomach
may
hurt.
In
fact,
it’s
not
good
to
hide
your
anger,
and
it’s
normal
for
you
to
get
angry
sometimes.
3
When
you
get
angry,
you
can
talk
about
it
with
adults,
such
as
parents,
teachers,
etc
4
Here
are
some
other
things
you
can
do
when
you
start
to
feel
angry:
count
from
1
to
100;
give
someone
a
hug,
go
for
a
bike
ride;
think
about
good
things,
etc.
Remember
that
when
you
are
angry,
how
you
act
can
make
everything
better
or
worse,
5
A.
But
anger
must
be
let
out
in
the
right
way,
without
hurting
others
or
yourself.B.
Don’t
let
your
anger
control
you.C.
As
soon
as
you
find
your
problems,
you
may
try
to
relax.D.
Usually,
your
body
will
tell
you
when
you
are
angry.E.
After
doing
that,
you’ll
find
those
bad
feelings
can
start
to
go
away.F.
Many
things
can
make
you
angry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Useless
Life
A
farmer
got
so
old
that
he
couldn’t
work
the
fields
any
more.
So
he
would
1
the
day
just
sitting
by
the
gate.
His
son,
still
working
the
farm,
would
look
up
2
time
to
time
and
see
his
father
sitting
there.
“He’s
of
no
3
any
more,”
the
son
thought
to
himself,
“he
doesn’t
do
anything!”
One
day
the
4
got
so
sad
by
this,
that
he
built
a
wood
coffin
(棺材),
pulled
it
over
to
the
gate,
and
told
his
father
to
5
.
His
father
didn’t
say
anything
and
climbed
inside.
6
closing
the
cap,
the
son
pulled
the
coffin
to
the
edge
of
the
farm
where
there
was
a
high
cliff
(悬崖).
As
he
came
close
to
the
drop,
he
7
a
light
knocking
on
the
cap
from
inside
the
coffin.
He
opened
it
up.
Still
lying
there
calmly,
the
8
looked
up
at
his
son.
“I
know
you
are
going
to
throw
me
over
the
cliff,
but
before
you
9
,
may
I
tell
you
something ”
“What
is
it ”
replied
the
son.
“Throw
me
over
the
cliff,
10
you
like,”
said
the
father,
“but
save
this
good
wood
coffin.
Your
children
might
need
to
use
it.”
(
)
1.
A.
take
B.
cost
C.
spend
(
)
2.
A.
at
B.
from
C.
too
(
)
3.
A.
use
B.
food
C.
clothes
(
)
4.
A.
doctor
B.
son
C.
father
(
)
5.
A.
get
up
B.
get
to
C.
get
in
(
)
6.
A.
Before
B.
After
C.
With
(
)
7.
A.
heard
B.
listened
C.
watched
(
)
8.
A.
others
B.
father
C.
children
(
)
9.
A.
leave
B.
go
C.
do
(
)
10.
A.
where
B.
how
C.
if
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Many
people
were
asking
me
the
same
question—How
did
a
22-year-old
woman
row
(划)
19-foot
boat
for
70
days
Well,
when
I
was
on
the
sea
alone,
the
biggest
difficulty
was
the
feeling
of
being
lonely.
I
started
on
January
3,
2010.
More
than
half
the
people
who
try
sailing
alone
often
give
up
in
the
first
two
weeks,
so
I
decided
to
finish
one-fourth
of
the
sailing
first,
which
took
about
20
days.
Day
20th,
January
22
came!
I
said
to
myself
that
I
should
be
happy.
But
I
was
feeling
so
bad.
It
seemed
to
be
the
hardest
day
for
me.
I
didn’t
see
land
for
over
two
weeks.
Every
day
I
did
the
same—rowing,
eating,
sleeping,
watching
the
sky
and
the
ocean…
Suddenly
I
saw
something
breaking
through
the
water
near
my
boat.
They
were
dolphins
they
circled
my
boat
and
were
close
enough
for
me
to
touch.
So
I
did!
Suddenly
I
felt
so
moved,
they
came
to
say
“Hello”,
just
when
I
needed
it
most.
I
was
no
longer
lonely,
believing
that
I
would
succeed.
And
I
made
it!
All,
2,
817
miles
I
got
to
the
coast
on
March
14,
after
70
days
and
five
hours
at
sea.
So
the
secret
of
my
success
is
the
moment
with
those
dolphins.
(
)
1.
What
was
the
greatest
trouble
with
the
woman
when
she
was
on
the
sea
A.
Getting
tick.
B.
Feeling
lonely.
C.
Getting
lost.
(
)
2.
How
many
parts
did
the
woman
divide
her
sailing
into
A.
Two.
B.
Three.
C.
Four.
(
)
3.
Which
part
is
most
difficult
for
those
people
who
try
sailing
alone
A.
The
first
day.
B.
The
last
day.
C.
The
first
two
weeks.
(
)
4.
The
underlined
word
“dolphin”
in
the
fourth
paragraph
meant
“a
kind
of
”.
A.
friendly
animal
B.
dangerous
fish
C.
special
plant
(
)
5.
What
is
the
best
title
of
the
passage
A.
Woman,
as
good
as
man
on
the
tea
B.
An
interesting
task
on
the
tea
C.
Dolphins,
the
secret
of
my
success
B
Can
dreams
come
true
John
Godley
bet
money
that
his
dreams
could
come
true.
During
his
life,
Mr.
Godley
dreamed
of
horse
races
several
times.
He
did
not
know
much
about
horses
or
horse
racing,
but
in
his
dreams
he
saw
the
names
of
the
horses
that
won
races.
He
remembered
these
dreams
after
he
woke
up,
and
he
put
what
he
knew
to
good
use.
The
first
time
Mr.
Godley
dreamed
of
horses
was
on
a
Friday
night.
Mr.
Godley
dreamed
that
he
was
reading
the
names
of
the
horses
that
won
Saturday’s
races.
The
next
morning
he
found
the
names
of
the
horses
from
his
dream
in
the
newspaper.
The
horses
were
racing
that
day.
He
bet
on
the
horses
and
won.
These
horse
racing
dreams
came
to
Mr.
Godley
off
and
on
for
the
next
twelve
years
of
his
lift.
During
that
period,
Mr.
Godley
had
eight
dreams
about
horses
winning
races.
He
always
bet
on
his
dreams,
and
he
always
won.
Mr.
Godley
never
knew
why
the
dreams
started
or
why
they
stopped.
Was
he
lucky
or
did
he
have
a
special
gift
The
world
may
never
know.
(
)
6.
What
special
gift
did
Mr.
Godley
have
A.
He
raced
horses
well.
B.
He
knew
a
lot
about
horses.
C.
He
dreamed
about
the
future.
(
)
7.
What
did
he
see
in
his
first
dream
about
horse
racing
A.
He
saw
the
race.
B.
He
saw
the
names
of
the
horses
in
the
paper.
C.
He
saw
himself
riding
a
horse.
(
)
8.
How
often
did
he
dream
about
horse
races
A.
Every
night.
B.
Twelve
times.
C.
Eight
times.
(
)
9.
How
often
did
his
dreams
come
true
A.
Every
time.
B.
Rarely.
C.
Sometimes.
(
)
10.
What
caused
his
dreams
to
stop
A.
He
bet
on
the
wrong
horse.
B.
His
horse
died.
C.
No
one
knows.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Thousands
of
years
ago,
human
didn’t
live
in
towns.
Sometimes
they
would
live
in
caves
1
build
camps
in
the
forest.
Only
about
thirty
people
2
in
each
camp.
The
men
would
go
hunting
while
the
women
and
children
collected
food
from
the
trees
around
the
camp.
All
the
food
was
3
between
everyone
in
the
group.
Every
few
weeks
they
moved
to
4
place
to
find
more
food.
It
was
a
simple
life,
but
people
had
to
be
clever.
They
had
to
make
everything
that
they
5
,
and
they
had
to
know
a
lot
about
plants
and
animals.
Nowadays
most
people
live
in
towns
and
cities,
and
they
6
in
offices
and
factories.
Life
is
easier
than
in
the
old
days.
There
are
fewer
7
,
but
there
is
less
excitement.
Some
people
go
8
excitement—sailing
around
the
world,
climbing
mountains,
or
exploring
caves.
Most
people
look
forward
to
the
9
,
a
time
when
they
can
enjoy
a
change
from
their
normal
life.
For
some
this
means
going
camping.
But
camping
today
is
10
from
camping
in
the
past.
Gas
cookers,
readymade
food
and
air-beds
mean
people
camp
much
more
comfortably
than
they
did
in
the
old
times.
(
)
1.
A.
and
B.
but
C.
or
(
)
2.
A.
lived
B.
talked
C.
came
(
)
3.
A.
found
B.
used
C.
shared
(
)
4.
A.
another
B.
other
C.
the
other
(
)
5.
A.
needed
B.
made
C.
ate
(
)
6.
A.
sleep
B.
rest
C.
work
(
)
7.
A.
dangers
B.
stories
C.
people
(
)
8.
A.
waiting
for
B.
looking
for
C.
turning
on
(
)
9.
A.
dreams
B.
gifts
C.
holidays
(
)
10.
A.
away
B.
different
C.
free
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Mom
and
dad
are
the
most
important
people
in
your
life.
They
have
been
looking
after
you
since
you
were
born.
You
should
always
love
them.
You
should
also
get
on
well
with
them.
But
some
children
don’t
know
how
to
do
this.
Here
are
some
ways
to
help
you.
Spend
more
time
with
your
parents.
Don’t
spend
too
much
time
playing
computer
games
or
watching
TV.
Ask
your
parents
to
play
with
you.
Talk
or
go
outside
with
them.
Be
kind
to
your
parents.
You
can
make
them
happy
with
a
smile
when
you
come
home.
You
can
send
your
mother
a
card
on
Mothers’
Day
or
tell
your
father
a
joke
on
his
birthday.
You
can
also
clean
your
room
by
yourself.
Work
hard.
If
you
do
your
best
in
your
studies,
your
parents
will
be
proud
of
you.
(
)
1.
You
should
love
your
parents
sometimes.
(
)
2.
It
is
not
right
for
you
to
play
computer
games
or
watch
TV.
(
)
3.
A
smile
can
make
your
parents
happy.
(
)
4.
Your
parents
will
be
proud
of
you
if
you
do
your
best.
(
)
5.
The
passage
is
mainly
about
how
to
get
on
well
with
your
parents.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
A:
Hello,
this
is
Ann.
Is
that
Helen
B:
Yes,
1
.
A:
Helen,
the
happy
weekend
is
2
.
Are
you
free
tomorrow
B:
Yes,
I’m
not
3
.
I’ve
already
finished
my
homework.
A:
What
are
you
going
to
do
B:
I’ve
no
4
.
What
about
you
A:
Let
me
5
.
Let’s
do
something
interesting
and
helpful.
Would
you
like
to
see
some
6
things
with
me
B:
Certainly.
7

A:
In
the
new
museum.
B:
Oh,
I
remember.
I
heard
of
it
last
week.
8
shall
we
get
there
A:
By
bike.
It’s
Saturday
tomorrow.
The
traffic
must
be
9
,
I
think.
B:
I
10
.
When
and
where
shall
we
meet
A:
At
the
gate
of
our
school
at
nine
in
the
morning.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
game
on
sport
not
do
true
secret
when
do
share
make
never
happy
One
day,
one
friend
asked
another,
“How
is
it
that
you
are
always
so
1

You
have
so
much
energy,
and
you
never
seem
to
get
down.”
With
her
eyes
smiling,
she
said,
“I
know
the
2
!”
“What
secret
is
that ”
To
which
she
replied,
“I’ll
tell
you
all
about
it,
but
you
have
to
3
the
Secret
with
others.”
“The
Secret
is
this:
I
have
learned
there
is
little
I
can
do
in
my
life
that
will
make
me
4
happy.
I
must
depend
on
God
to
make
me
happy
and
to
meet
my
needs.
When
a
need
comes
out
in
my
life,
I
have
to
trust
God
to
give
help.
I
have
learned
most
of
the
time
I
don’t
need
half
of
what
I
think
I
do.
He
has
5
let
me
down.
Since
I
learned
that
‘Secret’,
I
am
happy.”
The
questioner’s
first
thought
was,
“That’s
too
simple!”
But
she
recalled
how
she
thought
a
bigger
house
would
make
her
happy,
but
it
6
!
She
thought
a
better
paying
job
would
make
her
happy,
but
it
hadn’t.
7
did
she
realize
her
greatest
happiness
Sitting
on
the
floor
with
her
grandchildren,
playing
8
,
eating
pizza
or
reading
a
story,
a
simple
gift
from
God.
Now
you
know
it
too!
We
can’t
depend
on
people
to
make
us
happy.
Only
GOD
9
.
Trust
HIM!
And
now
I
pass
the
Secret
10
to
you!
So
once
you
get
it,
what
will
you
do
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Going
on
holidays
is
the
best
choice
for
the
Europeans
to
relax
themselves,
especially
in
the
UK.
However,
much
has
changed
during
the
past
decades
(几十年).
One
of
the
most
traditional
British
holidays
was
the
“seaside
holiday”.
Families
got
on
a
train
or
into
a
car
and
traveled
to
seaside
towns
nearby
to
sunbathe
on
the
beach,
buy
ice-creams
and
eat
fish
and
chips
and
so
on.
In
the
late
1970s,
more
and
more
British
people
started
traveling
to
other
countries
in
Europe
for
their
summer
holidays
(July—August)
because
the
weather
wasn’t
very
good,
even
in
summer.
The
“package
holiday”
was
particularly
popular
with
most
families.
In
the
1980s
and
1990s,
young
people
in
the
UK
became
wealthier,
so
many
of
them
traveled
to
countries
all
over
the
world
for
their
holidays.
These
years,
especially
after
the
world
financial
crisis
(金融危机),
most
British
people
can
not
afford
to
spend
their
holidays
abroad.
They
again
begin
to
choose
to
stay
in
their
own
homes
and
go
on
a
few
day
trips
rather
than
spending
money
on
hotels.
They
call
this
sort
of
vacation
a
“staycation”.
Time
Kind
of
holiday
Reason
Before
the
late
1970s
1
It
was
a
tradition.
In
the
late
1970s
Package
holiday
2
.
3
Overseas
holiday
Young
people
4
.
These
years
5
The
world
financial
crisis.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
A
Trip
to
the
Forest
One
day
Bob
took
two
of
his
friends
into
the
mountains.
They
put
up
their
tents
(帐篷)
and
then
rode
off
to
a
forest
to
see
how
the
trees
were
growing.
A.
He
could
not
find
the
road.
Bob
knew
there
were
two
roads.
B.
Bob
had
an
idea.
The
horses!
Let
the
horses
take
them
back!
C.
At
last
the
horses
stopped.
Where
were
they
D.
In
the
afternoon
when
they
were
about
ten
kilometers
from
their
camp,
it
started
to
snow.
E.
That
would
be
a
trip
of
thirty-five
kilometers
in
such
cold
weather!
It
was
getting
late.
They
rode
on
and
on.
F.
One
road
went
to
the
camp,
and
the
other
went
to
his
house.
G.
But
what
would
happen
if
the
horses
took
the
road
to
his
house
H.
But
all
was
white
snow.
Everything
was
the
same.
How
could
he
take
his
friends
back
to
the
camp
I.
More
and
more
snow
fell.
Soon
Bob
could
hardly
see
his
hands
before
his
face.
J.
None
of
them
could
tell.
Bob
looked
around.
What
was
that
under
the
tree
It
was
one
of
their
tents!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Mr.
Green
works
in
an
office
in
France.
1
Saturday,
he
went
to
the
office
to
do
some
work.
When
he
got
on
the
elevator
(电梯),
it
stopped
between
the
2
.
Mr.
Green
could
not
get
out
of
the
elevator.
He
started
to
3
but
no
one
4
him.
Then
Mr.
Green
remembered
that
it
was
a
holiday
in
France.
No
one
5
going
to
come
to
work
until
Tuesday.
There
was
6
for
him
to
do.
He
had
to
wait.
With
nothing
to
eat
7
drink,
Mr.
Green
slept
for
most
of
the
time.
Early
Tuesday
morning,
his
8
came
to
work
and
found
the
elevator
was
not
working.
When
the
elevator
was
9
Mr.
Green
came
out.
He
was
cold,
weak
and
tired.
He
had
been
in
the
elevator
for
about
sixty-four
10
!
Now
Mr.
Green
says,
“I
will
only
use
elevators
if
they
have
a
telephone
in
them.”
(
)
1.
A.
Last
B.
All
C.
None
e
(
)
2.
A.
buildings
B.
rooms
C.
floors
(
)
3.
A.
buildings
B.
shout
C.
say
(
)
4.
A.
saw
B.
came
C.
heard
(
)
5.
A.
is
B.
was
C.
were
(
)
6.
A.
something
B.
everything
C.
nothing
(
)
7.
A.
and
B.
for
C.
or
(
)
8.
A.
wife
B.
workmates
C.
parents
(
)
9.
A.
opened
B.
closed
C.
clean
(
)
10.
A.
minutes
B.
hours
C.
days
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Some
people
have
a
very
poor
sense
of
direction.
Unluckily,
I
am
one
of
them.
I
have
visited
a
place
many
times
but
I
may
still
get
lost
there
the
next
time.
When
I
was
a
little
girl,
I
never
dared
ask
strangers
the
way.
And
so
I
used
to
walk
round
in
circles
and
hope
that
by
chance
I
would
get
to
the
place
I
was
going
to.
Now,
I
am
no
longer
too
shy
to
ask
people
for
directions,
but
I
often
receive
helpless
or
even
wrong
information.
So
I
try
to
avoid
giving
people
wrong
directions.
If
anyone
asks
me
the
way
somewhere,
I
always
say,
“Sorry,
I
am
a
stranger
here.”
Once
on
my
way
to
work
I
was
stopped
by
a
man.
He
asked
me
if
I
could
tell
him
the
way
to
the
Friendship
Building.
I
gave
him
my
usual
replay.
But
just
as
I
walked
on
only
a
few
steps,
I
realized
that
he
had
asked
the
way
to
my
office
building.
However,
I
had
no
time
to
turn
back
and
look
for
him.
I
was
rushing
to
meet
with
someone
at
my
office
and
I
didn’t
want
to
keep
him
waiting.
When
I
just
got
to
my
office,
the
secretary
showed
in
the
man
who
had
asked
me
for
directions.
Imagine
how
embarrassed
I
was
and
how
surprised
he
was
when
we
saw
each
other
at
the
first
sight!
(
)
1.
The
writer
always
refuses
to
give
people
direction
because
_______.
A.
she’s
a
stranger
to
the
city
B.
she’s
afraid
of
giving
wrong
directions
C.
she
has
no
time
to
help
others
(
)
2.
A
man
stopped
the
writer
on
the
way
to
______.
A.
ask
for
the
direction
B.
ask
for
the
time
C.
make
friends
with
her
(
)
3.
The
Friendship
Building
is
the
place
where
the
writer
_______.
A.
lives
B.
studies
C.
works
(
)
4.
The
word
“embarrassed”
in
the
last
paragraph
means
________.
A.
尴尬
B.
困惑
C.
激动
(
)
5.
Which
of
the
following
is
TRUE
according
to
the
passage
A.
The
writer
is
too
shy
to
give
others
directions.
B.
The
writer
has
a
very
poor
direction.
C.
The
writer
never
got
lost
when
she
was
young.
B
Have
you
ever
been
sad
because
you
failed
in
something
If
so,
please
remember,
for
often,
achieving
what
you
except
is
not
the
most
important
thing.
Here
is
a
story
to
tell
you
why.
One
day,
a
little
boy
decided
to
dig
a
hole
behind
his
house
after
watching
a
science
program.
As
he
was
working,
a
couple
of
boys
stopped
by
to
watch.
“What
are
you
doing ”
asked
one
of
the
visitors.
“I
want
to
dig
a
deep
hole
all
the
day
through
the
earth!”
the
boy
answered
excitedly.
The
other
boys
began
to
laugh,
telling
him
that
it
was
impossible
to
do
it.
Then
they
left.
The
little
boy
kept
on
digging
and
digging.
Suddenly,
a
few
small
colorful
stones
caught
his
eyes.
He
collected
them
and
put
them
into
a
glass
jar
patiently.
Humming
a
song,
he
went
on
digging.
The
jar
was
full
soon.
Then
he
talked
to
himself
calmly
and
proudly,
“Maybe
I
can’t
finish
digging
all
the
way
through
the
earth,
but
look
at
what
I
have
in
the
process
(过程)
of
digging!”
The
boy’s
goal
was
too
difficult,
but
it
did
cause
him
to
go
on,
in
other
words,
to
cause
us
to
keep
working!
Not
every
goal
will
be
achieved.
Not
every
job
will
end
up
with
a
success.
Not
every
dream
will
come
true.
But
when
you
can’t
achieve
your
goal,
maybe
you
can
say,
“Yes,
but
look
what
I’ve
found
along
the
way!
There
are
so
many
wonderful
things
that
have
come
into
my
life
because
I
tried
to
do
something!”
It
is
the
digging
that
life
is
lived.
It
is
the
unexpected
joy
on
the
journey
that
really
has
a
meaning.
(
)
6.
What
did
the
boy
do
after
watching
the
program
A.
He
bought
a
glass
jar.
B.
He
started
to
dig
a
hole.
C.
He
played
with
some
visitors.
(
)
7.
What
did
the
other
boys
think
of
the
little
boy
A.
He
was
silly.
B.
He
was
strict.
C.
He
was
strong-minded.
(
)
8.
When
did
the
boy
find
the
stones
A.
Before
he
met
the
other
boys.
B.
When
he
wanted
to
give
up
digging.
C.
After
the
older
boys
laughed
at
him.
(
)
9.
What
does
the
underlined
sentence
“It
is
the
digging
that
life
is
lived.”
mean
according
to
the
article
A.
Life
is
to
make
a
big
success.
B.
Life
is
to
find
the
colorful
stones.
C.
Life
is
on
the
way
to
achieve
the
goal.
(
)
10.
Which
is
the
best
title
for
this
article
A.
Enjoying
the
Process
B.
How
to
Achieve
Goals
C.
A
Journey
through
the
Earth
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Rose
didn’t
see
her
school
IC
card
at
lunch
time.
She
asked
her
classmates
and
looked
for
it
everywhere.
But
she
couldn’t
1
it.
Later,
one
girl
said
that
she
saw
Kate
take
a
card
from
Rose’s
desk.
So
Rose
got
very
2
.
When
she
met
Kate
in
the
afternoon,
Rose
3
,
“You
have
stolen
my
card!”
Hearing
this,
Kate
began
to
cry,
“No,
no,
I
didn’t
steal
it!
I
only
took
it
by
4
.”
But
Rose
didn’t
think
so
and
they
began
to
fight.
Just
then
a
teacher
came
up
and
5
what
had
happened.
Kate
told
the
whole
story.
She
said
her
pen
pal
came
to
see
her
in
the
morning.
She
was
so
6
that
she
took
the
card
carelessly.
Then
they
went
for
lunch
happily.
“I
used
the
card,
but
I
had
thought
it
was
mine.
I
didn’t
know
it
was
Rose’s
7
she
asked.
I
was
too
afraid
to
explain
it
to
her.
So
I
decided
to
put
the
8
back
with
some
money
secretly.
I
am
sorry,
Rose.”
Kate
said
in
a
low
9
.
“It’s
just
a
misunderstanding
(误会)!”
said
the
teacher.
Tears
came
into
Rose’s
eyes.
Then
she
said,
“I
was
10
sorry,
Kate!
I
hope
we
are
still
good
friends.”
(
)
1.
A.
find
B.
buy
C.
put
(
)
2.
A.
happy
B.
angry
C.
afraid
(
)
3.
A.
sang
B.
shouted
C.
read
(
)
4.
A.
card
B.
words
C.
mistake
(
)
5.
A.
asked
B.
understood
C.
allowed
(
)
6.
A.
sad
B.
excited
C.
interested
(
)
7.
A.
until
B.
after
C.
if
(
)
8.
A.
pen
B.
book
C.
card
(
)
9.
A.
voice
B.
sound
C.
noise
(
)
10.
A.
not
B.
also
C.
never
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Peter
was
nine
years
old.
One
day
his
friend
Tom
said
to
him,
“I’m
going
to
have
a
birthday
party
at
home
on
Sunday.
Peter,
can
you
come ”
Peter
asked
his
mother,
and
she
said,
“Yes,
you
can
go.”
Before
Peter
went
to
the
party
on
Sunday
afternoon,
his
mother
said
to
him,
“You
must
be
polite.
Don’t
ask
for
food.
Wait
until
someone
gives
it
to
you.
”
“All
right,
mum.”
Peter
answered.
Then
he
went
to
Tom’s
house.
There
were
a
lot
of
children
at
the
party.
They
played
for
an
hour,
and
then
Tom’s
mother
gave
them
some
food,
but
she
forgot
to
give
Peter
any.
He
waited
for
a
moment,
and
then
he
held
his
plate
up
and
said
loudly,
“Does
anyone
want
a
nice
clean
plate ”
(
)
1.
Tom
had
a
birthday
party
on
Sunday.
(
)
2.
Peter’s
mother
asked
Peter
to
be
polite
at
the
party.
(
)
3.
There
were
few
children
at
the
party.
(
)
4.
Tom’s
mother
forgot
to
give
Peter
any
food.
(
)
5.
Peter
wanted
to
give
the
nice
plate
to
someone
that
needed
it.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
Girl:
What’s
the
matter,
Henry
You
look
1
.
Boy:
I
missed
my
math
class
this
morning.
Girl:
What
2

Boy:
My
alarm
clock
didn’t
3
,
and
I
overslept.
Girl:
How
did
you
get
to
school
Boy:
Well,
I
4
the
bus,
of
course.
So
I
rode
my
bicycle,
5
I
was
late.
Girl:
Have
you
ever
been
late
to
school
6

Boy:
No,
7
.
I
don’t
know
what
to
do.
Girl:
Did
you
go
to
the
office
and
sign
your
name
on
their
paper
Boy:
8
.
Should
I
do
that
Girl:
Yes.
Then
they
will
probably
tell
your
math
teacher
what
happened.
Boy:
I’ve
never
9
to
the
office.
Have
you
ever
been
late
Girl:
Yes,
I
was
late
once
10
week.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
sorry
will
look
both
we
but
drink
much
idea
run
One
afternoon
Jack
and
Sarah
were
1
tea
at
home
when
Jack
asked
her
to
go
out
for
a
walk.
“That’s
a
great
2
,
Jack.
Shall
we
go
to
the
park ”
said
Sarah.
“Should
we
take
an
umbrella
It
might
rain.”
“I
don’t
think
it’s
necessary,
Sarah.
The
radio
says
there
3
be
no
rain.”
Jack
said.
On
their
way
to
the
park,
Sarah
noticed
that
the
clouds
4
very
dark.
Sarah
was
worried
that
it
would
rain,
5
they
didn’t
have
an
umbrella.
When
they
arrived
at
the
park,
the
clouds
were
6
bigger.
Soon
it
began
to
rain
and
Sarah
was
very
sorry
she
didn’t
have
an
umbrella.
“Come
on!
Let’s
7
home!”
shouted
Jack.
When
they
got
home,
they
were
8
wet.
“I
think
9
should
have
taken
an
umbrella,”
said
Sarah.
“I’m
so
10
.
Next
time
you
shouldn’t
listen
to
me.
Just
take
an
umbrella,”
Jack
said.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
A
taboo
is
a
social
action
that
is
not
allowed.
Every
culture
in
the
world
has
its
own
taboos.
The
breaking
of
a
taboo
sometimes
makes
people
feel
uncomfortable.
I
learned
this
through
my
own
experience.
Last
weekend,
Wang
Lin
and
I
showed
two
foreigners
around
our
city.
Mr.
Singh
was
from
India
and
Mr.
White
from
the
USA.
When
I
held
out
my
left
hand
to
shake
hands
with
him,
Mr.
Singh
seemed
to
be
unhappy.
Mr.
White,
however,
was
quite
casual
(随意的).
He
said
hello
to
me
with
a
big
smile
and
a
wave
of
his
hand.
In
the
evening,
we
stopped
at
a
restaurant
for
dinner.
I
noticed
that
Mr.
Singh
didn’t
touch
the
beef
and
Mr.
White
seemed
not
to
like
chickens’
claws
(爪子).
During
the
meal,
Wang
Lin
said
sorry
to
Mr.
Singh
and
continued
to
explain
that
we
didn’t
know
it
was
a
taboo
in
India
to
shake
one’s
left
hand.
Mr.
Singh
explained
that
since
oxen
(牛)
are
sacred
(神圣的)
in
India,
people
don’t
eat
beef
there.
Mr.
White
joined
in
and
said
that
it
was
not
usual
in
the
States
for
people
to
eat
other’s
personal
space.
Isn’t
it
a
good
lesson
to
remember
Main
idea
People
sometimes
feel
1
if
one
breaks
a
taboo.
Facts
In
India
Indians
don’t
eat
2
because
they
think
oxen
are
sacred.It’s
3
to
shake
one’s
left
hand.
In
the
USA
Although
it’s
not
a
taboo,
Americans
4
eat
chickens’
feet.
Conclusion
If
you
5
a
taboo,
you
can
get
on
well
with
the
people
from
different
cultures.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
It
is
easier
to
go
down
the
hill
than
to
climb
up
the
hill,
so
it
is
easier
to
fall
into
bad
habits
than
into
good
ones.
A.
School
boys
first
pick
up
little
bad
habits
in
the
school
and
on
the
street.
B.
Bad
habits
do
not
come
suddenly.
C.
If
they
see
bigger
boys
smoking,
they
also
want
to
learn
to
smoke.
D.
When
they
can’t
write
their
lessons,
they
copy
from
their
schoolmates.
E.
When
they
get
bigger,
the
habits
become
stronger
and
stronger,
so
that
they
can
no
longer
get
rid
of
(摆脱,除掉)
them.
F.
They
come
little
by
little
without
one
being
aware
of
(意识到)
their
danger.
G.
How
necessary
it
is
that
we
get
rid
of
the
bad
habits
in
the
beginning.
H.
From
copying,
they
learn
to
steal,
from
gambling,
they
learn
to
lie.
I.
If
they
see
their
friends
gambling
(赌博),
they
want
to
gamble.
J.
At
last
they
become
distrusted
by
everybody.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
One
afternoon,
I
was
walking
down
the
street
when
I
saw
my
father’s
new
car.
To
my
surprise,
I
saw
a
young
woman
driving
1
.
“She
stole
(偷)
my
father’s
car,”
I
thought.
2
I
quickly
stopped
a
taxi
and
got
in.
I
said
to
the
driver,
“Follow
that
new
car
3
.”
And
I
told
him
why.
I
called
the
police
in
the
taxi.
Soon
we
heard
the
4
of
a
police
car
and
its
loudspeaker.
The
police
told
the
woman
to
stop
her
car.
Our
car
came
to
a
stop,
too.
I
5
right
now
and
said
to
the
woman,
“It’s
not
your
car.
It’s
my
6
.”
The
woman
smiled
and
said,
“Oh.
You’re
Mr.
Johnson’s
younger
son,
right
I
saw
your
7
at
your
father’s
office
last
week.”
Before
I
could
say
8
word,
the
woman
said
that
she
was
my
father’s
new
assistant.
My
father
asked
her
to
drive
his
car
to
buy
something
in
the
shop.
After
hearing
her
words,
we
called
my
father
and
he
told
us
what
she
said
was
9
.
The
police
and
the
taxi
driver
laughed.
I
10
very
sorry.
Don’t
you
think
my
story
funny
(
)
1.
A.
that
B.
in
C.
it
(
)
2.
A.
So
B.
But
C.
And
(
)
3.
A.
after
B.
in
front
C.
at
the
back
(
)
4.
A.
sound
B.
noise
C.
voice
(
)
5.
A.
got
in
B.
got
into
C.
got
out
(
)
6.
A.
father
B.
mother
C.
father’s
(
)
7.
A.
mother
B.
photo
C.
car
(
)
8.
A.
another
B.
other
C.
else
(
)
9.
A.
wrong
B.
well
C.
right
(
)
10.
A.
felt
B.
feel
C.
fell
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Alan
worked
in
an
office
in
the
city.
He
worked
very
hard
and
really
looked
forward
to
his
holiday.
He
usually
went
to
the
seaside,
but
one
year
he
saw
an
ad
in
a
newspaper
“Enjoy
country
life.
Spend
a
few
weeks
at
William
Farm.
Good
food,
fresh
air,
horse
riding,
walking,
fishing…”
“This
sounds
like
a
good
idea.”
he
thought,
“I’ll
spend
a
month
at
William
Farm.
I’ll
go
horse
riding,
walking
and
fishing.
It’ll
be
different
from
the
seaside.”
Four
days
later,
he
returned
home.
“What’s
wrong
with
William
Farm ”
His
friend
Jack
asked
him.
“Didn’t
you
enjoy
country
life ”
“Country
life
was
fine,”
Alan
said.
“But
there
was
another
problem.”
“Oh,
what
problem ”
“Well,
the
first
day
I
was
there,
a
sheep
died,
and
we
had
roast
(烤肉)
mutton
for
dinner.”
“Fresh
meat
is
the
best.”
“I
know,
but
on
the
second
day
a
cow
died,
and
we
had
roast
beef
for
dinner.”
“Lucky
you!”
“You
don’t
understand,”
Alan
said.
“On
the
third
day
a
pig
died
and
we
had
roast
pork
for
dinner.”
“A
different
roast
every
day.”
Jack
said.
“Let
me
finish.”
Alan
said,
“On
the
fourth
day
a
farmer
died
and
I
didn’t
want
to
stay
there
for
dinner.”
(
)
1.
Alan
saw
______
in
a
newspaper.
A.
an
ad
B.
a
letter
C.
a
story
(
)
2.Alan
usually
went
to
______
on
the
vacation.
A.
the
mountains
B.
the
countryside
C.
the
seaside
(
)
3.Alan
spent
_______
at
William
Farm.
A.
four
days
B.
three
months
C.
a
month
(
)
4.Alan
had
roast
_______
for
dinner
on
the
third
day.
A.
mutton
B.
pork
C.
beef
(
)
5.
From
the
passage
we
know
that
_______.
A.
Alan
left
the
farm
because
he
missed
his
family
B.
Alan
left
the
farm
because
he
had
four
dinners
at
the
farm
C.
Alan
came
back
home
because
he
was
afraid
of
the
fourth
dinner
B
James
is
a
good
student
and
he
has
lots
of
friends,
but
he
also
has
a
problem.
Some
older
boys
are
bullying
(欺负)
him
at
school.
James
is
very
unhappy
and
he
doesn’t
know
what
to
do
about
it.
Here
are
some
suggestions
to
him
and
other
teenagers
in
this
situation.
Don’t
feel
worried.
It’s
not
your
mistake!
Being
bullied
can
make
you
feel
very
lonely
and
angry,
but
you
are
not
alone.
Don’t
feel
that
you
have
to
hide
the
problem.
You
should
find
a
person
you
can
trust,
and
tell
them.
It
might
be
your
teacher,
your
parents,
or
even
your
friend’s
parents.
After
you
tell
someone,
you
will
get
some
support
and
feel
some
relief
(解脱).
Speaking
to
an
adult
might
make
you
nervous,
but
here
are
other
things
you
can
do.
Some
people
express
their
feelings
more
easily
on
paper.
Write
a
letter
to
someone
or
keep
a
diary.
Include
all
the
details
(细节)
about
what
the
bullies
do,
as
well
as
when
and
where
the
bullying
happens.
You
can
use
it
as
proof
to
show
what
is
going
on.
And
it
is
a
wonderful
idea
to
show
your
letter
or
diary
to
a
teacher
or
another
responsible
adult.
Then
the
bullies
will
feel
very
afraid
if
their
names
appear
in
a
letter!
Also,
don’t
show
you
are
sad
and
don’t
try
and
fight
with
the
bullies.
You
could
get
in
trouble
yourself.
Ignore
them
and
just
walk
away.
The
bullies
will
soon
stop.
(
)
6.
What
do
you
think
the
text
is
trying
to
tell
us
A.
What
to
do
about
being
bullied.
B.
How
to
be
a
good
student
at
school.
C.
What
to
write
well
in
a
diary.
(
)
7.
Why
does
the
text
advise
you
not
to
feel
worried
if
bullied
A.
Because
you
are
not
alone.
B.
Because
it
is
not
your
fault.
C.
Because
someone
has
known
about
it.
(
)
8.
You’d
better
go
and
find
a
person
you
can
trust
and
______.
A.
know
what
happens
B.
learn
from
them
C.
ask
for
help
(
)
9.
If
you
remember
and
follow
the
suggestions
above,
______.
A.
nobody
will
speak
to
the
bullies
B.
everybody
will
feel
some
relief
C.
the
bullies
will
soon
stop
(
)
10.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“ignore”
mean
in
the
text
A.
Take
no
notice
of.
B.
Take
care
of.
C.
Make
full
use
of.
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
What
would
you
do
if
tomorrow
was
the
end
of
the
world
People
usually
ask
the
questions
1
that.
If
tomorrow
was
the
end
of
the
world,
I
would
2
home
at
once
for
a
day’s
stay
with
my
beloved
parents.
Making
lots
of
money,
3
around
the
world
and
enjoying
the
most
delicious
food
are
all
my
life
dream,
but
nothing
is
more
important
than
my
dear
4
.
On
that
day,
at
the
5
of
the
world,
I
hope
after
breakfast,
I
would
go
to
market
with
Mama
and
Daddy
and
buy
their
favorite
things.
I
would
cook
lunch
for
them
6
I
hardly
ever
do
that
when
I
come
home.
After
having
a
nap
in
the
noon,
we
have
the
afternoon
7
and
watch
TV
together.
After
supper,
I
would
have
Daddy
in
one
hand
and
my
Mama
in
the
other
to
have
a
walk.
We
would
tell
jokes
that
8
in
my
childhood
and
I
would
remember
it
even
if
I
die.
If
someone
asked
me
question
like
“Who
is
your
most
important
person
in
your
life ”,
my
answer
would
always
be
the
9
—“My
handsome
daddy
and
my
sweet
mama!”
I
am
the
10
daughter
in
the
world
because
my
parents
are
the
best.
My
family
is
not
rich
but
it
is
rich
in
affection
(情感).
(
)
1.
A.
before
B.
after
C.
like
(
)
2.
A.
fly
B.
walk
C.
leave
(
)
3.
A.
looking
B.
watching
C.
traveling
(
)
4.
A.
family
B.
father
C.
wife
(
)
5.
A.
beginning
B.
end
C.
moment
(
)
6.
A.
as
for
B.
such
as
C.
even
though
(
)
7.
A.
tea
B.
meal
C.
food
(
)
8.
A.
came
B.
happened
C.
found
(
)
9.
A.
same
B.
rest
C.
difference
(
)
10.
A.
youngest
B.
tallest
C.
happiest
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Last
Friday
after
I
got
my
pay,
I
went
shopping
on
my
way
home.
In
the
crowded
supermarket,
I
lost
my
purse
and
my
money
was
gone
with
it.
I
felt
very
angry
and
sad.
We
were
not
rich
and
the
money
was
important
for
us.
How
could
I
tell
my
wife
about
it
I
felt
really
sorry
for
losing
the
money.
When
I
got
home,
I
cleaned
the
house
and
prepared
a
nice
meal.
I
hoped
what
I
did
could
comfort
(安慰)
my
wife.
When
she
came
back,
she
was
surprised
to
see
the
clean
house
and
the
nice
meal.
Then
I
began
to
tell
my
story
when
we
were
at
table,
but
my
wife
didn’t
respond
(反映)
as
if
she
had
not
heard
my
words.
Maybe
she
was
trying
hard
to
hide
her
anger,
I
thought.
“I’ve
lost
my
pay.”
I
said
to
her
again.
“I
see.”
She
didn’t
seem
to
be
angry
with
me.
For
a
moment,
she
said
nothing
but
enjoyed
the
meal
with
me.
“I’ve
lost
my
money,”
I
could
not
help
asking,
“why
don’t
you
blame
(责备)
me ”
“Oh,
my
dear,”
she
raised
her
eyes,
looked
at
me
and
said,
“I’m
thinking
about
how
to
comfort
you.
It’s
the
thief
who
is
to
be
blamed!”
(
)
1.
I
got
my
pay
last
Monday.
(
)
2.
In
the
supermarket
I
lost
my
purse
and
money.
(
)
3.
I
cleaned
the
house
because
I
liked
doing
it.
(
)
4.
My
wife
was
surprised
to
see
what
I
did.
(
)
5.
When
my
wife
heard
my
story,
she
became
very
angry.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
A:
Hi,
Tony.
Why
are
you
in
such
a
hurry
What
1
to
you
B:
I
lost
my
backpack.
I
2
putting
it
under
a
tree
beside
the
playground.
A:
Really
3
did
you
lose
it
B:
An
hour
ago.
I
was
playing
soccer
on
the
playground.
It
was
4
after
that.
A:
5
luck!
Is
there
anything
important
in
your
backpack
B
Yes,
there
are
6
.
A:
Don’t
worry.
Maybe
someone
took
it
by
7
.
B:
8
should
I
do
A:
You’d
better
go
to
Lost
and
Found
for
9
.
B:
Good
idea.
Where
is
Lost
and
Found
A:
It’s
just
on
the
second
floor
in
the
office
building.
Perhaps
you
are
10
to
find
it
there.
B:
I
hope
so.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
at
hard
change
up
before
win
happen
down
choose
practice
come
part
Life
is
not
easy,
so
I’d
like
to
say
“When
anything
1
,
believe
in
yourself!”
When
I
was
a
young
boy,
I
was
too
shy
to
speak
to
anyone.
My
classmates
often
laughed
2
me.
I
was
sad
but
could
do
nothing.
Later,
something
happened,
and
it
3
my
life.
It
was
an
English
speech
contest
(比赛).
My
mother
asked
me
to
take
4
in
it.
What
a
terrible
idea!
It
meant
I
had
to
speak
5
all
the
teachers
and
students
of
my
school!
“Come
on,
boy.
Believe
in
yourself!
You
are
sure
to
6
.”
Then
mother
and
I
talked
about
many
different
topics.
At
last
I
7
the
topic
“Believe
in
yourself”.
I
tried
my
best
to
remember
all
the
speech
and
8
it
over
100
times.
With
my
mother’s
great
love,
I
did
well
in
the
contest.
I
could
9
believe
my
ears
when
the
news
came
that
I
had
won
the
first
place.
I
heard
the
cheers
from
the
teachers
and
students.
Those
classmates
who
once
looked
10
on
me,
now
all
said
congratulations
to
me.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
Dear
Know,I
need
some
advice
on
how
to
make
friends!
I
have
just
moved
to
a
new
city.
I
am
13.
I
don’t
know
anybody
here
and
I
want
to
make
some
friends.
What’s
the
best
way
Where
can
I
meet
people
Yours,Tony
Dear
Tony,
There
are
lots
of
things
you
can
do.
First,
you
can
ride
your
bike
in
your
neighborhood
and
try
to
find
some
kids.
When
you
find
some,
you
can
go
up
and
talk
to
them.
You
should
also
let
your
parents
know
that
you
want
to
make
friends
because
they
can
help
you.
Maybe
you
can
ask
your
parents
to
take
you
to
the
library
or
some
places
where
there
are
lots
of
kids.
You
could
try
joining
an
art
class
or
a
sports
club.
These
are
all
great
ways
to
meet
people.
You
can
try
making
friends
at
churches
(教堂)
too
if
you
go
to
church
on
Sundays.
Try
to
be
active
wherever
you
are,
but
just
be
yourself
and
don’t
try
so
hard.
It
takes
time
and
patience
(耐心).
I
hope
you
will
find
a
best
friend
soon!Yours,
Know
Information
Card
Tony’s
problem:
he
doesn’t
know
how
to
1
.
Know’s
advice
Places
to
meet
other
kids
Neighborhood,
the
2
and
churches.
Activities
Join
an
art
class
or
a
3
.
How
to
behave
Try
to
be
4
,
but
don’t
try
too
5
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
根据短文内容，从短文后的选项中选出适当的选项补全短文。
How
do
you
tell
a
boy
you
don’t
like
him
as
a
boyfriend
You
might
like
a
certain
boy,
but
he
likes
someone
else.
1
It
happens
a
lot
in
the
middle
school
years
—
and
beyond.
But
what
do
you
do,
especially
if
you
feel
very
embarrassed
(为难的)
to
tell
a
boy
whether
you
like
him
or
not
2
It
doesn’t
feel
good
to
learn
someone
doesn’t
find
you
fascinating
(迷人的)
and
wonderful.
But
you
can’t
lie
about
it
either.
3
But
looking
down
upon
him,
telling
him
to
go
away,
or
telling
a
friend
to
tell
him
“No
way!”
would
hurt
his
feelings.
So
what
do
you
do
4
But
if
you’re
honest
without
being
mean,
that’s
much
better
for
you
both.
Try
this
way,
for
example,
to
give
him
a
small
compliment:
“
5
I
hope
you’re
OK
with
that.”
Good
luck
and
we
hope
that
works!
A.
It’s
always
OK
to
be
honest
about
how
you
feel.B.
You’re
a
guy,
but
I
like
you
just
as
a
friend,
not
a
boyfriend.C.
Then
there
may
be
a
boy
who
likes
you,
but
you
don’t
like
him
“in
that
way”.D.
How
do
you
tell
a
girl
you
don’t
like
her
as
a
girlfriend E.
If
you’re
honest,
he
will
probably
be
disappointed
(失望的).F.
The
first
rule
is
to
imagine
yourself
in
his
position
(位置).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
答案：阅读周周练
一、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
Three
small
fish
lived
in
the
sea.
When
they
were
very
young,
their
parents
died.
They
had
to
1
each
other
day
after
day.
Finally,
they
grew
up
and
2
to
swim
deeper
and
further.
One
morning,
the
three
fish
were
3
to
a
shallow
(浅的)
water
by
a
big
wave
(浪).
A
small
boat
was
taken
there,
too.
It
was
hard
for
the
fish
to
go
back
to
the
sea
because
the
boat
was
fight
in
front
of
them.
The
largest
fish
realized
that
they
were
4
and
said
they
had
to
find
a
way
to
leave
there
as
fast
as
possible.
The
second
largest
fish
5
with
his
elder
brother,
but
the
youngest
one
did
not.
He
said
that
there
was
much
6
for
their
activities,
so
he
would
not
worry
at
all
and
still
swam
around
7
.
At
last,
the
largest
fish
returned
to
the
8
by
jumping
over
the
lowest
part
of
the
boat.
The
second
largest
fish
also
succeeded
in
9
his
elder
brother
in
the
other
side
of
water.
But
the
youngest
one
didn’t
follow
them
and
still
swam
joyfully.
Two
hours
later,
when
the
10
rose
up,
the
water
in
the
small
shallow
corner
dried
up.
The
fish
who
did
not
try
to
return
to
the
sea
died
of
lack
(缺乏)
of
water.
(
)
1.
A.
listen
to
B.
look
after
C.
talk
with
(
)
2.
A.
dared
B.
hated
C.
refused
(
)
3.
A.
allowed
B.
given
C.
taken
(
)
4.
A.
in
safety
B.
in
doubt
C.
in
danger
(
)
5.
A.
agreed
B.
talked
C.
compared
(
)
6.
A.
time
B.
food
C.
water
(
)
7.
A.
slowly
B.
sadly
C.
happily
(
)
8.
A.
sea
B.
river
C.
lake
(
)
9.
A.
catching
B.
joining
C.
taking
(
)
10.
A.
storm
B.
stars
C.
sun
二、阅读理解。
阅读下面的短文，根据短文内容选择正确答案。
A
Do
you
have
any
foreign
friends
Do
you
know
their
characteristics
(特征)
The
Germans
are
very
quiet
and
they
always
keep
calm.
They
don’t
like
to
speak
more
words.
They
look
very
serious.
They
like
different
kinds
of
amusements.
The
Germans
are
very
hard-working.
They
like
tidiness,
especially
the
women,
who
always
keep
their
home
clean.
In
some
ways,
the
Englishmen
look
the
same
as
the
Germans.
They
are
very
quiet
and
never
talk
too
much
with
the
strangers.
They
are
really
polite,
so
we
often
hear
they
say
“Thank
you.”
or
“Sorry.”
The
gentlemen
are
also
the
Englishmen.
The
French’s
holidays
are
very
long.
They
like
traveling
and
usually
spend
their
long
time
staying
in
other
countries.
The
Frenchmen
are
more
outgoing
than
the
Germans.
It
is
very
easy
to
make
friends
with
them.
Compared
to
the
Frenchmen,
the
Americans
are
more
outgoing.
And
they
are
even
opener
than
all
of
the
Europeans.
They
don’t
like
to
depend
on
others.
So
it
is
very
common
that
the
students
do
part-time
jobs
in
their
free
time.
And
in
Americans’
eyes,
success
is
an
important
part
in
their
life.
(
)
1.
According
to
the
passage,
______
are
very
quiet.
A.
only
the
Germans
B.
both
the
Germans
and
the
Englishmen
C.
only
the
Englishmen
(
)
2.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“tidiness”
mean
in
Chinese
A.
整洁.
B.
安静.
C.
时尚.
(
)
3.
In
the
writer’s
eyes,
the
gentlemen
are
______.
A.
the
Germans
B.
the
Frenchmen
C.
the
Englishmen
(
)
4.
What
can
we
learn
about
the
Frenchmen
from
the
passage
A.
They
are
more
outgoing
than
the
Americans.
B.
It
is
very
easy
to
make
friends
with
them.
C.
They
like
traveling
in
their
own
country.
(
)
5.
Which
is
the
best
title
of
the
passage
A.
Foreigners’
hobbies
B.
Who
are
more
outgoing
C.
Characteristics
of
the
foreigners
B
A
little
girl
walked
to
and
from
school
every
day.
Though
it
was
not
fine
and
clouds
speared
in
the
sky
that
morning,
the
little
girl
made
her
daily
trip
to
school
as
usual.
When
school
was
over,
winds
became
stronger
and
it
began
to
rain.
The
mother
of
the
little
girl
felt
worried
that
her
daughter
would
be
afraid
when
she
walked
home
from
school
and
that
lightning
might
frighten
her
child.
Following
the
bright
light
of
lightning,
the
mother
quickly
got
into
her
car
and
drove
to
her
child’s
school.
As
the
mother
drove
along
the
road,
she
saw
her
little
girl
walking
alone
in
the
rain.
To
her
great
surprise,
she
found
that
when
a
lightning
came,
her
daughter
stopped,
looked
up
and
smiled.
Another
lightning
came
and
then
another
followed.
With
each
lightning,
the
little
girl
stopped,
looked
up
and
smiled.
Inside
the
car,
the
mother
asked
her
daughter,
“What
were
you
doing
Why
did
you
look
up
and
smile
when
the
lightning
came ”
the
little
girl
answered
with
a
smile,
“Mum,
you
know,
God
was
looking
at
me.
Each
time
I
felt
a
little
afraid
walking
in
the
rain,
god
would
take
a
picture
of
me.
I
knew
he
was
playing
a
game
with
me.”
(
)
6.
How
did
the
little
girl
go
to
school
every
day
A.
By
car.
B.
On
foot.
C.
By
bus.
(
)
7.
What
was
the
weather
like
that
day
A.
It
was
rainy.
B.
It
was
fine.
C.
It
was
just
windy.
(
)
8.
At
first,
the
mother
felt
worried
because
______.
A.
she
couldn’t
help
her
daughter
B.
her
daughter
hadn’t
taken
her
umbrella
C.
her
daughter
might
be
afraid
of
the
lightning
(
)
9.According
to
the
article,
we
can
know
that
the
little
girl
was
______.
A.
proud
B.
shy
C.
brave
(
)
10.
This
passage
is
possibly
from
______.
A.
a
menu
B.
a
magazine
C.
a
dictionary
三、完形填空。
通读下面短文，从A、B、C三个选项中选出可以填入空白处的正确答案。
In
a
small
town
in
France,
there
was
a
farmer
who
lived
alone.
Every
day
he
1
a
pound
of
butter
to
his
neighbour,
who
was
a
baker.
One
day
the
baker
decided
to
2
the
butter
to
see
if
he
was
getting
a
pound.
After
he
weighed
it,
he
found
that
he
wasn’t.
The
baker
then
took
3
farmer
to
the
judge
(法官).
The
judge
asked
the
farmer
if
he
had
any
ways
to
weigh
the
butter.
The
farmer
replied,
“I
am
so
4
that
I
do
not
have
enough
money
to
buy
anything
to
weigh
it,
5
I
do
not
have
a
kind
of
scale
(天平).”
The
judge
asked,
“Then
how
do
you
weigh
the
butter ”
The
farmer
replied,
“Before
the
baker
started
buying
butter
from
6
,
I
had
bought
bread
from
him.
So
now
every
time
when
I
bring
home
the
bread
from
the
baker,
I
put
it
on
the
scale
and
give
him
the
butter
of
the
same
weight.”
We
7
what
we
give
to
others
in
life.
Whenever
you
take
action,
ask
yourself
this
8
,
“Am
I
honest ”
Honesty
or
dishonesty
can
become
a
9
.
Some
dishonest
people
can
lie
(说谎)
without
a
red
face.
Others
lie
so
much
that
they
do
not
even
10
what
the
truth
is
any
more.
But
who
is
it
bad
for
As
a
matter
of
fact,
those
who
lie
will
hurt
themselves
by
their
own
dishonest
behaviour.
(
)
1.
A.
gave
B.
fed
C.
sold
(
)
2.
A.
weigh
B.
watch
C.
cut
(
)
3.
A.
a
B.
an
C.
the
(
)
4.
A.
rich
B.
poor
C.
honest
(
)
5.
A.
and
B.
so
C.
but
(
)
6.
A.
I
B.
my
C.
me
(
)
7.
A.
get
back
B.
look
back
C.
give
back
(
)
8.
A.
answer
B.
question
C.
help
(
)
9.
A.
difference
B.
habit
C.
mistake
(
)
10.
A.
study
B.
mean
C.
know
四、阅读判断正误。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容判断句子的正误。正确的填“A”，错误的填“B”。
Have
you
ever
been
annoyed
with
yourself
when
you
forget
something
important
Maybe
you
think
you
have
a
bad
memory.
Do
you
know
your
memory
can
be
developed
Here
are
some
ways
for
you
to
have
a
try.
◇Be
positive.
Do
not
tell
yourself
your
memory
is
bad.
Or
your
mind
will
believe
it
and
you
won’t
remember
things
easily.
If
you
think
you
can.
Then
you
can.
◇Relax
yourself.
People
are
too
nervous
to
remember
things
well.
Relaxing
will
help
you
a
lot.
Take
deep
breaths
(深呼吸)
and
you
can
remember
things
easily.
◇Think
more.
Things
you
know
may
help
you
to
remember
something
new.
For
example,
when
you
remember
the
word
“classroom”,
think
of
the
old
word
“class”
and
“room”,
it
will
help
you
remember
quickly.
◇Do
more
practice.
Like
your
body,
memory
can
be
improved
through
exercise.
The
more
times
you
practice,
the
more
easily
you
will
remember
something.
◇Eat
healthy
food.
Healthy
eating
can
improve
your
memory.
It
is
reported
that
fish
is
good
for
improving
memory,
so
try
to
eat
more
fish
from
now
on.
(
)
1.
An
active
attitude
is
good
for
you
to
improve
your
memory.
(
)
2.
Relaxing
is
not
useful
for
people
to
develop
memory.
(
)
3.
Something
you
already
know
may
help
you
remember
what
you
are
learning.
(
)
4.
Memory
can’t
be
improved
by
practicing.
(
)
5.
If
you
want
to
have
a
better
memory,
a
healthy
eating
habit
is
very
important.
五、完成对话。
在对话空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确。一空一词（含缩写词）。
(
Eric
came
back
home
from
school
on
Friday
evening.
)
Eric:
Hi,
Dad!
I’m
back.
Dad:
Hmm,
Eric!
1
was
your
study
this
week
Eric:
Pretty
good.
And
I
have
good
news
to
tell
you.
Do
you
want
to
know
Dad:
Of
course.
What’s
2

Eric:
I
3
the
first
prize
in
the
English
speech
contest.
Dad:
Well
4
.
How
is
your
science
Any
progress
Eric:
Yes,
Dad!
At
5
I
tried
my
best
and
learned
a
lot
from
my
mistakes.
Dad:
Good!
I’m
sure
that
you
can
catch
up
6
your
classmates
very
soon.
Eric:
Thank
you,
Dad!
I’ve
been
7
these
days
and
I
feel
tired.
Shall
we
have
a
picnic
tomorrow
Dad:
A
picnic
Why
not
We
all
need
to
relax
8
.
Eric:
Great!
Where
are
we
going
Dad:
Let’s
go
to
Central
Park
at
8:00
in
the
morning.
Eric:
What
will
be
the
9
tomorrow
Dad:
The
radio
says
it’s
a
fine
day.
Finish
your
homework
10
and
we
can
help
mum
to
something
for
the
picnic.
Eric:
That’s
wonderful,
Dad.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
六、短文填空。
用下面方框中单词的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
receive
minute
when
helpful
early
if
I
from
waste
three
year
but
Michael
Leung,
a
famous
TV
host
(主持人)
in
Hong
Kong,
wrote
a
letter
to
his
son.
It
is
not
only
1
to
children,
but
also
good
for
all
ages.
The
following
are
chosen
2
his
letter.
1.
Life
is
short.
While
you
are
3
it
today,
you’ll
realize
you
are
at
the
end
of
it
tomorrow.
So
the
earlier
you
start
to
value
your
life,
the
4
you
can
enjoy
it.
2.
You
might
not
be
successful
5
you
don’t
study
hard,
although
a
lot
of
successful
people
haven’t
6
higher
education.
3.
I
don’t
expect
you
to
support
(供养)
me
for
the
rest
of
7
life,
so
I’m
not
going
to
do
the
same
for
you.
You
will
be
living
on
your
own
when
you
grow
up.
4.
You
can
require
yourself
to
be
nice
to
others,
8
you
shouldn’t
expect
the
same
from
others.
5.
I’ve
been
buying
the
lottery
(彩票)
for
almost
twenty
9
,
but
I’m
still
poor.
I
have
never
got
the
10
place
even
once.
So
you
have
to
work
hard
to
be
successful.
There
is
no
free
lunch
in
the
world.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
七、完成表格。
阅读下面短文，根据其内容，完成表格中所缺的信息。
The
stressful
school
life
and
unhealthy
lifestyles
cause
some
problems
to
students.
Here
are
some
key
mistakes
and
some
tips.
·Sitting
too
long
So
much
homework
and
many
computer
games
make
students
sit
for
several
hours
without
standing
or
walking
around.
Because
of
long
time
sitting,
some
students
have
got
diabetes
(糖尿病)
and
heart
disease
(疾病).
Tips:
Get
up
and
out
of
your
chair
for
about
five
minutes
every
hour.
Walk
over
to
a
person
instead
of
sending
e-mails
or
text
messages.
·Eating
diet
Some
students
develop
unhealthy
eating
habits.
Fast
food
becomes
more
often.
Heavy
studying
and
stress
prevent
students
from
eating
meals
diet.
Tips:
Eat
breakfast
with
eggs
at
the
start
of
every
day.
Buy
healthy
snacks
like
nuts
and
fruits,
and
eat
them
between
meals.
Have
three
meals
a
day
at
the
right
time.
·Having
lots
of
energy
drinks
An
energy
drink
or
an
extra
cup
of
coffee
might
seem
like
the
only
way
to
get
through
a
late-night
study
time.
High
levels
of
caffeine
(咖啡因)
can
also
cause
high
blood
pressure.
Tips:
The
safest
way
to
get
more
energy
is
to
eat
regular
meals,
sleep
well,
exercise
and
drink
lots
of
water.
Title：A
guide
to
student
1
Key
mistakes
Tips
Sitting
too
long
Some
students
2
from
diabetes
and
heart
disease.
●Get
up
and
out
of
your
chair
often.●Walk
over
to
a
person
instead.
Eating
irregularly
Heavy
studying
and
stress
prevent
students
from
eating
meals
regularly.
●Eat
breakfast
with
eggs
every
3
.●Buy
and
eat
healthy
snacks.●Have
three
meals
a
day.
Having
lots
of
energy
drinks
With
the
4
of
the
energy
drinks
and
coffee,
some
students
can
get
through
a
late-night
study
time.
●Eat
5
meals,
sleep
well,
exercise
and
drink
lots
of
water.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
八、短文排序。
阅读下列句子，根据其内容重新排列所有句子的顺序，使其构成意义完整正确、逻辑顺序合理的语篇，并将代表句子的字母填写在答题卡上相应的位置。
A
good
breakfast
is
important.
A.
Not
everyone
can
easily
understand
it.
B.
Your
body
needs
food
for
morning
activities.
C.
But
why
is
a
good
breakfast
important
D.
On
a
cold
morning
a
cup
of
hot
drinks
is
necessary.
E.
By
breakfast
time
you
have
not
eaten
anything
about
twelve
hours.
F.
One
good
breakfast
should
be
rice
or
bread,
an
egg,
milk
and
fruit.
G.
If
you
don’t
eat
breakfast,
you
will
be
hungry
the
whole
morning.
H.
A
good
breakfast
helps
you
to
smile
more
easily.
I.
It
helps
you
to
be
more
friendly.
J.
And
it
also
helps
you
to
work
better
and
play
more
happily.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
答案：